\chapter{CUBE On-Line Help}
\label{sec:CUBE:package}
\section{List of CUBE languages}
\label{sec:CUBE:languages}
\index{Language list}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  HELP\                        +blue{Commands to get help or debug the program}
  ADM\                                  +blue{Commands to manage list of cubes}
  EDIT\                                          +blue{Commands to edit a cube}
  GO\                      +blue{Commands to visualize or interact with a cube}
  SET\                 +blue{Commands that set global behaviors of the program}
  COMPUTE\                       +blue{Basic mathematical operations on a cube}
  CUBE\             +blue{Commands that performs various computations on cubes}
  MASK\                                  +blue{Commands to interact with masks}
  FIELD\                     +blue{Commands to interact with fields of vectors}
  FIT\                                     +blue{Commands for spectral fitting}
  HISTOGRAM\                      +blue{Compute histograms and operate on them}
  STATISTICS\                     +blue{Simple statistical operations on cubes}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\newpage{}
\section{HELP Language On-Line Help}
\label{sec:HELP:help}
\index{HELP command list}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  HELP\                        +blue{Commands to get help or debug the program}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  ?                                                 +blue{List known languages}
  COLLECT                         +blue{Collect all the helps in a single file}
  HELP                                 +blue{Get help for commands and options}
  DEBUG                       +blue{Set which debugging messages are displayed}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{?}
\label{sec:HELP:?:help}
\index{HELP ? command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        [HELP\]+blue{?}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                          +blue{List known languages}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{COLLECT}
\label{sec:HELP:COLLECT:help}
\index{HELP COLLECT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                            [HELP\]+blue{COLLECT} [File] [+blue{/FORMAT} Kind]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                        +blue{Collect all the helps in a single file}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) FILE                                    +blue{Output file name}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FORMAT     +blue{Collect options, arguments, and flags under the named kind}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COLLECT /FORMAT}
\label{sec:HELP:COLLECT:FORMAT:help}
\index{HELP COLLECT /FORMAT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/FORMAT} Kind
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FORMAT     +blue{Collect options, arguments, and flags under the named kind}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) KIND                                        +blue{Format kind}
     Possible values: TEX or FLAGS

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{HELP}
\label{sec:HELP:HELP:help}
\index{HELP HELP command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                 [HELP\]+blue{HELP} [COMMAND [/OPTION]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                             +blue{Get help for commands and options}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) COMMAND                                     +blue{Command name}
  #2 (optional) OPTION                                       +blue{Option name}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{DEBUG}
\label{sec:HELP:DEBUG:help}
\index{HELP DEBUG command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                 [HELP\]+blue{DEBUG} [ON|OFF] [+blue{/LIBADM} Subtopic ON|OFF]
                [+blue{/LIBCUBE} Subtopic ON|OFF] [+blue{/LIBCOMPUTE} Subtopic ON|OFF]
                    [+blue{/LIBEDIT} Subtopic ON|OFF] [+blue{/LIBFIT} Subtopic ON|OFF]
                   [+blue{/LIBFITSIO} Subtopic ON|OFF] [+blue{/LIBGO} Subtopic ON|OFF]
                      [+blue{/LIBIO} Subtopic ON|OFF] [+blue{/LIBSET} Subtopic ON|OFF]
              [+blue{/LIBSIMULATE} Subtopic ON|OFF] [+blue{/LIBTOOLS} Subtopic ON|OFF]
                              [+blue{/MESSAGES} ON|OFF] [+blue{/TRANSPOSITION} ON|OFF]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                    +blue{Set which debugging messages are displayed}

  DEBUG without any argument or option will display which debug or
  trace messages are active. All debug messages for a topic can be
  turned ON or OFF at once if no option is provided. Also all debug
  messages for all topics can be turned ON or OFF if no option is given
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) ONOFF                       +blue{Debug all messages ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIBADM                 +blue{Enable or disable messages for the ADM library}
  /LIBCUBE               +blue{Enable or disable messages for the CUBE library}
  /LIBCOMPUTE         +blue{Enable or disable messages for the COMPUTE library}
  /LIBEDIT               +blue{Enable or disable messages for the EDIT library}
  /LIBFIT                 +blue{Enable or disable messages for the FIT library}
  /LIBFITSIO           +blue{Enable or disable messages for the FITSIO library}
  /LIBGO                   +blue{Enable or disable messages for the GO library}
  /LIBIO                   +blue{Enable or disable messages for the IO library}
  /LIBSET                 +blue{Enable or disable messages for the SET library}
  /LIBSIMULATE       +blue{Enable or disable messages for the SIMULATE library}
  /LIBTOOLS             +blue{Enable or disable messages for the TOOLS library}
  /MESSAGES                     +blue{Enable or disable messages in debug mode}
  /TRANSPOSITION                +blue{Enable or disable transposition messages}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DEBUG /LIBADM}
\label{sec:HELP:DEBUG:LIBADM:help}
\index{HELP DEBUG /LIBADM option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                         +blue{/LIBADM} Subtopic ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIBADM                 +blue{Enable or disable messages for the ADM library}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SUBTOPIC             +blue{Select subtopic for debug messages}
     Possible values: ALLOCATION, TRACE, OTHERS or *
  #2 (mandatory) ONOFF                          +blue{Debug messages ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DEBUG /LIBCUBE}
\label{sec:HELP:DEBUG:LIBCUBE:help}
\index{HELP DEBUG /LIBCUBE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/LIBCUBE} Subtopic ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIBCUBE               +blue{Enable or disable messages for the CUBE library}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SUBTOPIC             +blue{Select subtopic for debug messages}
     Possible values: ALLOCATION, TRACE, OTHERS or *
  #2 (mandatory) ONOFF                          +blue{Debug messages ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DEBUG /LIBCOMPUTE}
\label{sec:HELP:DEBUG:LIBCOMPUTE:help}
\index{HELP DEBUG /LIBCOMPUTE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                     +blue{/LIBCOMPUTE} Subtopic ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIBCOMPUTE         +blue{Enable or disable messages for the COMPUTE library}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SUBTOPIC             +blue{Select subtopic for debug messages}
     Possible values: ALLOCATION, TRACE, OTHERS or *
  #2 (mandatory) ONOFF                          +blue{Debug messages ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DEBUG /LIBEDIT}
\label{sec:HELP:DEBUG:LIBEDIT:help}
\index{HELP DEBUG /LIBEDIT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/LIBEDIT} Subtopic ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIBEDIT               +blue{Enable or disable messages for the EDIT library}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SUBTOPIC             +blue{Select subtopic for debug messages}
     Possible values: TRACE, OTHERS or *
  #2 (mandatory) ONOFF                          +blue{Debug messages ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DEBUG /LIBFIT}
\label{sec:HELP:DEBUG:LIBFIT:help}
\index{HELP DEBUG /LIBFIT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                         +blue{/LIBFIT} Subtopic ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIBFIT                 +blue{Enable or disable messages for the FIT library}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SUBTOPIC             +blue{Select subtopic for debug messages}
     Possible values: ALLOCATION, TRACE, OTHERS or *
  #2 (mandatory) ONOFF                          +blue{Debug messages ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DEBUG /LIBFITSIO}
\label{sec:HELP:DEBUG:LIBFITSIO:help}
\index{HELP DEBUG /LIBFITSIO option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                      +blue{/LIBFITSIO} Subtopic ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIBFITSIO           +blue{Enable or disable messages for the FITSIO library}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SUBTOPIC             +blue{Select subtopic for debug messages}
     Possible values: TRACE, OTHERS or *
  #2 (mandatory) ONOFF                          +blue{Debug messages ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DEBUG /LIBGO}
\label{sec:HELP:DEBUG:LIBGO:help}
\index{HELP DEBUG /LIBGO option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                          +blue{/LIBGO} Subtopic ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIBGO                   +blue{Enable or disable messages for the GO library}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SUBTOPIC             +blue{Select subtopic for debug messages}
     Possible values: TRACE, OTHERS or *
  #2 (mandatory) ONOFF                          +blue{Debug messages ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DEBUG /LIBIO}
\label{sec:HELP:DEBUG:LIBIO:help}
\index{HELP DEBUG /LIBIO option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                          +blue{/LIBIO} Subtopic ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIBIO                   +blue{Enable or disable messages for the IO library}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SUBTOPIC             +blue{Select subtopic for debug messages}
     Possible values: ALLOCATION, TRANSPOSITION, TRACE, OTHERS or *
  #2 (mandatory) ONOFF                          +blue{Debug messages ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DEBUG /LIBSET}
\label{sec:HELP:DEBUG:LIBSET:help}
\index{HELP DEBUG /LIBSET option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                         +blue{/LIBSET} Subtopic ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIBSET                 +blue{Enable or disable messages for the SET library}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SUBTOPIC             +blue{Select subtopic for debug messages}
     Possible values: TRACE, OTHERS or *
  #2 (mandatory) ONOFF                          +blue{Debug messages ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DEBUG /LIBSIMULATE}
\label{sec:HELP:DEBUG:LIBSIMULATE:help}
\index{HELP DEBUG /LIBSIMULATE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                    +blue{/LIBSIMULATE} Subtopic ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIBSIMULATE       +blue{Enable or disable messages for the SIMULATE library}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SUBTOPIC             +blue{Select subtopic for debug messages}
     Possible values: ALLOCATION, TRACE, OTHERS or *
  #2 (mandatory) ONOFF                          +blue{Debug messages ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DEBUG /LIBTOOLS}
\label{sec:HELP:DEBUG:LIBTOOLS:help}
\index{HELP DEBUG /LIBTOOLS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                       +blue{/LIBTOOLS} Subtopic ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIBTOOLS             +blue{Enable or disable messages for the TOOLS library}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SUBTOPIC             +blue{Select subtopic for debug messages}
     Possible values: TRACE, OTHERS or *
  #2 (mandatory) ONOFF                          +blue{Debug messages ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DEBUG /MESSAGES}
\label{sec:HELP:DEBUG:MESSAGES:help}
\index{HELP DEBUG /MESSAGES option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                +blue{/MESSAGES} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MESSAGES                     +blue{Enable or disable messages in debug mode}

  If enabled, messages in debug mode will also show the calling
  subroutine name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                          +blue{Debug messages ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DEBUG /TRANSPOSITION}
\label{sec:HELP:DEBUG:TRANSPOSITION:help}
\index{HELP DEBUG /TRANSPOSITION option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                           +blue{/TRANSPOSITION} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /TRANSPOSITION                +blue{Enable or disable transposition messages}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                  +blue{Transposition messages ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\section{ADM Language On-Line Help}
\label{sec:ADM:help}
\index{ADM command list}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  ADM\                                  +blue{Commands to manage list of cubes}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  CHECKSUM                              +blue{Compute the CRC of the cube data}
  DIRECTORY                +blue{Define directories where CUBE looks for files}
  EXPORT                                             +blue{Export reduced data}
  FIND                                       +blue{Search for cubes on the DAG}
  FLAG                                              +blue{List available flags}
  FREE                                              +blue{Free the current DAG}
  HISTORY               +blue{Display and interact with the processing history}
  IMPORT                                       +blue{Import files into the DAG}
  LIST            +blue{List the cubes in the default index or the given index}
  MEMORY                   +blue{Display the current memory and disk footprint}
  REMOVE                                      +blue{Remove a cube from the DAG}
  SNAPSHOT                    +blue{Save the current DAG structure to the disk}
  UNDO                         +blue{Undo a command and remove it from history}
  UPDATE                                 +blue{Update family name and/or flags}
  VERIFY                      +blue{Verify if a FITS header is CUBE-conformant}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{CHECKSUM}
\label{sec:ADM:CHECKSUM:help}
\index{ADM CHECKSUM command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                         [ADM\]+blue{CHECKSUM} [CubeId]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                              +blue{Compute the CRC of the cube data}

  Compute the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) of the cube data
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,subset) *                                   +blue{Any cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{DIRECTORY}
\label{sec:ADM:DIRECTORY:help}
\index{ADM DIRECTORY command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax    [ADM\]+blue{DIRECTORY} [+blue{/RAW} dirname] [+blue{/TMP} dirname] [+blue{/RED} dirname]
                                            [+blue{/DEFAULTS}] [+blue{/FREE}] [+blue{/MERGE}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                 +blue{Define directories where CUBE looks for files}

  Define the directories where CUBE looks for and/or stores raw (/RAW),
  temporary (/TMP) or reduced (/RED) cubes. Defaults are ./raw/,
  ./tmp/, and ./red/ respectively.

  If the TMP directory is redefined, the DAG file available in this
  directory (if any) is implicitly reimported. Use option /FREE to free
  any previous DAG.

  Without argument, display the current values. The current values are
  also visible in the SIC structure CUBE%DIR%.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RAW                          +blue{Define directory(ies) providing raw data}
  /TMP                         +blue{Define directory buffering temporary data}
  /RED                             +blue{Define directory storing reduced data}
  /DEFAULTS                                +blue{Reset directories to defaults}
  /FREE                 +blue{Free the DAG before reimporting the one from TMP}
  /MERGE                           +blue{Merge the snapshot in the current DAG}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DIRECTORY /RAW}
\label{sec:ADM:DIRECTORY:RAW:help}
\index{ADM DIRECTORY /RAW option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/RAW} dirname
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RAW                          +blue{Define directory(ies) providing raw data}

  This can be a single directory or a semicolumn-separated list of
  paths, e.g. "./;./raw/"
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) DIRNAME                           +blue{Directory name or path}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DIRECTORY /TMP}
\label{sec:ADM:DIRECTORY:TMP:help}
\index{ADM DIRECTORY /TMP option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/TMP} dirname
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /TMP                         +blue{Define directory buffering temporary data}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) DIRNAME                           +blue{Directory name or path}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DIRECTORY /RED}
\label{sec:ADM:DIRECTORY:RED:help}
\index{ADM DIRECTORY /RED option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/RED} dirname
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RED                             +blue{Define directory storing reduced data}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) DIRNAME                           +blue{Directory name or path}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DIRECTORY /DEFAULTS}
\label{sec:ADM:DIRECTORY:DEFAULTS:help}
\index{ADM DIRECTORY /DEFAULTS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/DEFAULTS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DEFAULTS                                +blue{Reset directories to defaults}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DIRECTORY /FREE}
\label{sec:ADM:DIRECTORY:FREE:help}
\index{ADM DIRECTORY /FREE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/FREE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FREE                 +blue{Free the DAG before reimporting the one from TMP}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DIRECTORY /MERGE}
\label{sec:ADM:DIRECTORY:MERGE:help}
\index{ADM DIRECTORY /MERGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/MERGE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MERGE                           +blue{Merge the snapshot in the current DAG}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{EXPORT}
\label{sec:ADM:EXPORT:help}
\index{ADM EXPORT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax    [ADM\]+blue{EXPORT} [cube] [+blue{/FORMAT} type] [+blue{/BLANKING} [Bval [Eval]]]
                     [+blue{/FILENAME} filename] [+blue{/AS} family[:flag1,...,flagn]]
                 [+blue{/DIRECTORY} dirname] [+blue{/ACCESS} Order] [+blue{/CHECKSUM} ON|OFF]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                           +blue{Export reduced data}

  Export a cube to the RED (reduction) directory, by default the file
  name is based on its family name and flag. The option /NAME allows to
  customize the output file base name, and optionally the directory and
  the file extension.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset/speset) *                 +blue{Cube to be exported}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FORMAT                                 +blue{Set the data format to be used}
  /BLANKING           +blue{Export with blank values instead of NaN (GDF only)}
  /FILENAME                  +blue{Customize the name of exported file on disk}
  /AS                      +blue{Customize the identifier of the exported cube}
  /DIRECTORY                              +blue{Customize the export directory}
  /ACCESS                        +blue{Set the access order of the output file}
  /CHECKSUM   +blue{Switch computation of the checksum during export on or off}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (subset) *                                        +blue{The exported cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{EXPORT /FORMAT}
\label{sec:ADM:EXPORT:FORMAT:help}
\index{ADM EXPORT /FORMAT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/FORMAT} type
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FORMAT                                 +blue{Set the data format to be used}

  Default is FITS if the option is omitted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) TYPE                                        +blue{Format type}
     Possible values: FITS, GDF or CDF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{EXPORT /BLANKING}
\label{sec:ADM:EXPORT:BLANKING:help}
\index{ADM EXPORT /BLANKING option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                         +blue{/BLANKING} [Bval [Eval]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BLANKING           +blue{Export with blank values instead of NaN (GDF only)}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) BVAL                      +blue{Blanking value (default -1000)}
  #2 (optional) EVAL             +blue{Tolerance on blanking value (default 0)}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{EXPORT /FILENAME}
\label{sec:ADM:EXPORT:FILENAME:help}
\index{ADM EXPORT /FILENAME option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                              +blue{/FILENAME} filename
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FILENAME                  +blue{Customize the name of exported file on disk}

  This option customizes the name of the file to be created on disk
  (use option /DIRECTORY to customize the target directory). The proper
  extension is implicitly added if missing, depending on the format to
  be used.

  The family name is not changed by this option. To change the family
  name use option /AS. If this option is not used the default file name
  on disk is: family-flag1-...-flagn
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) FILENAME                            +blue{Customized file name}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{EXPORT /AS}
\label{sec:ADM:EXPORT:AS:help}
\index{ADM EXPORT /AS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                    +blue{/AS} family[:flag1,...,flagn]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /AS                      +blue{Customize the identifier of the exported cube}

  Set the family name and optionally the flags of the output cube. To
  consult the list of all available flags consult ADM\FLAGLIST
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) IDENTIFIER                               +blue{New identifier}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{EXPORT /DIRECTORY}
\label{sec:ADM:EXPORT:DIRECTORY:help}
\index{ADM EXPORT /DIRECTORY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                              +blue{/DIRECTORY} dirname
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DIRECTORY                              +blue{Customize the export directory}

  If option is not given defaults to the default RED directory (set
  with command ADM\DIRECTORY)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) DIRECTORY                               +blue{Export directory}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{EXPORT /ACCESS}
\label{sec:ADM:EXPORT:ACCESS:help}
\index{ADM EXPORT /ACCESS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/ACCESS} Order
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ACCESS                        +blue{Set the access order of the output file}

  Default is IMAGE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ORDER                                        +blue{Order name}
     Possible values: IMAGE or SPECTRUM

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{EXPORT /CHECKSUM}
\label{sec:ADM:EXPORT:CHECKSUM:help}
\index{ADM EXPORT /CHECKSUM option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                +blue{/CHECKSUM} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CHECKSUM   +blue{Switch computation of the checksum during export on or off}

  Default is OFF.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{FIND}
\label{sec:ADM:FIND:help}
\index{ADM FIND command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax  [ADM\]+blue{FIND} [+blue{/ENTRY} n1 [n2]] [+blue{/OBSERVATORY} name] [+blue{/SOURCE} name]
                              [+blue{/LINE} name] [+blue{/FAMILY} name] [+blue{/FLAGS} flags]
                          [+blue{/IDENTIFIER} id1 [id2]] [+blue{/FREQUENCY} frequency]
                                 [+blue{/PROJECTION} Name] [+blue{/CHILDREN} ParentID]
                                                [+blue{/DATATYPE} value [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                   +blue{Search for cubes on the DAG}

  Search the DAG to build a current Index, according to selection
  criteria defined by the options. If no options are given the current
  index will contains all cubes on the DAG.

  The current index description is available in the structure IDX%.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ENTRY                 +blue{search for the specified range of entry numbers}
  /OBSERVATORY                      +blue{search for the specified observatory}
  /SOURCE                                          +blue{search by source name}
  /LINE                                              +blue{search by line name}
  /FAMILY                           +blue{search for the specified family name}
  /FLAGS                           +blue{search for the specified flag pattern}
  /IDENTIFIER              +blue{search for the specified range of identifiers}
  /FREQUENCY                    +blue{Search for the specified frequency [MHz]}
  /PROJECTION                       +blue{Search for the named projection kind}
  /CHILDREN                        +blue{Search all children of the named cube}
  /DATATYPE                                   +blue{Select datatype to be used}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FIND /ENTRY}
\label{sec:ADM:FIND:ENTRY:help}
\index{ADM FIND /ENTRY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/ENTRY} n1 [n2]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ENTRY                 +blue{search for the specified range of entry numbers}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) N1                                 +blue{First entry in range}
  #2 (optional) N2                                 +blue{Second entry in range}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FIND /OBSERVATORY}
\label{sec:ADM:FIND:OBSERVATORY:help}
\index{ADM FIND /OBSERVATORY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/OBSERVATORY} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /OBSERVATORY                      +blue{search for the specified observatory}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                                   +blue{Observatory name}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FIND /SOURCE}
\label{sec:ADM:FIND:SOURCE:help}
\index{ADM FIND /SOURCE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/SOURCE} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SOURCE                                          +blue{search by source name}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                                        +blue{Source name}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FIND /LINE}
\label{sec:ADM:FIND:LINE:help}
\index{ADM FIND /LINE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/LINE} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LINE                                              +blue{search by line name}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                                          +blue{Line name}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FIND /FAMILY}
\label{sec:ADM:FIND:FAMILY:help}
\index{ADM FIND /FAMILY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/FAMILY} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FAMILY                           +blue{search for the specified family name}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                                        +blue{Family name}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FIND /FLAGS}
\label{sec:ADM:FIND:FLAGS:help}
\index{ADM FIND /FLAGS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/FLAGS} flags
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FLAGS                           +blue{search for the specified flag pattern}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FLAGS                                      +blue{Flag pattern}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FIND /IDENTIFIER}
\label{sec:ADM:FIND:IDENTIFIER:help}
\index{ADM FIND /IDENTIFIER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                           +blue{/IDENTIFIER} id1 [id2]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /IDENTIFIER              +blue{search for the specified range of identifiers}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ID1                           +blue{First identifier in range}
  #2 (optional) ID2                           +blue{Second identifier in range}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FIND /FREQUENCY}
\label{sec:ADM:FIND:FREQUENCY:help}
\index{ADM FIND /FREQUENCY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/FREQUENCY} frequency
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FREQUENCY                    +blue{Search for the specified frequency [MHz]}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FREQUENCY                               +blue{Frequency value}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FIND /PROJECTION}
\label{sec:ADM:FIND:PROJECTION:help}
\index{ADM FIND /PROJECTION option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                +blue{/PROJECTION} Name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PROJECTION                       +blue{Search for the named projection kind}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) PROJECTION                              +blue{Projection name}
     Possible values: NONE, GNOMONIC, ORTHOGRAPHIC, AZIMUTHAL,
     STEREOGRAPHIC, LAMBERT, AITOFF, RADIO, SFL, MOLLWEIDE, NCP or
     CARTESIAN

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FIND /CHILDREN}
\label{sec:ADM:FIND:CHILDREN:help}
\index{ADM FIND /CHILDREN option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                              +blue{/CHILDREN} ParentID
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CHILDREN                        +blue{Search all children of the named cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,none,anyset) *                          +blue{Parent identifier}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FIND /DATATYPE}
\label{sec:ADM:FIND:DATATYPE:help}
\index{ADM FIND /DATATYPE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                          +blue{/DATATYPE} value [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DATATYPE                                   +blue{Select datatype to be used}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) KEYWORD                                  +blue{DATATYPE value}
     Possible values: *, REAL, DOUBLE, COMPLEX, INTEGER or LONG

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{FLAG}
\label{sec:ADM:FLAG:help}
\index{ADM FLAG command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                 [ADM\]+blue{FLAG} [+blue{/ADD} Name] [+blue{/DEBUG}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                          +blue{List available flags}

  List all the available flags
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ADD                                       +blue{Add a new user-defined flag}
  /DEBUG                       +blue{List all the flags under debugging format}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FLAG /ADD}
\label{sec:ADM:FLAG:ADD:help}
\index{ADM FLAG /ADD option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/ADD} Name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ADD                                       +blue{Add a new user-defined flag}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                                          +blue{Flag name}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FLAG /DEBUG}
\label{sec:ADM:FLAG:DEBUG:help}
\index{ADM FLAG /DEBUG option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/DEBUG}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DEBUG                       +blue{List all the flags under debugging format}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{FREE}
\label{sec:ADM:FREE:help}
\index{ADM FREE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      [ADM\]+blue{FREE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                          +blue{Free the current DAG}

  Free the DAG, i.e. delete all the cube and history structures. Beware
  memory-only objects are lost during this operation (use command
  SNAPSHOT to save them for possible later reuse). In return the DAG is
  ready for use as if starting from scratch.

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{HISTORY}
\label{sec:ADM:HISTORY:help}
\index{ADM HISTORY command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax[ADM\]+blue{HISTORY} [+blue{/CUBE} CubeId] [+blue{/DIGRAPH} CubeId] [+blue{/COMMAND} CubeId]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract              +blue{Display and interact with the processing history}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CUBE           +blue{Display parent cubes of the named cube in the terminal}
  /DIGRAPH               +blue{Display parent cubes of the named cube in a PDF}
  /COMMAND     +blue{Display parent commands of the named cube in the terminal}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HISTORY /CUBE}
\label{sec:ADM:HISTORY:CUBE:help}
\index{ADM HISTORY /CUBE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/CUBE} CubeId
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CUBE           +blue{Display parent cubes of the named cube in the terminal}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,none,anyset) *                    +blue{The starting point cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HISTORY /DIGRAPH}
\label{sec:ADM:HISTORY:DIGRAPH:help}
\index{ADM HISTORY /DIGRAPH option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                 +blue{/DIGRAPH} CubeId
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DIGRAPH               +blue{Display parent cubes of the named cube in a PDF}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,none,anyset) *                    +blue{The starting point cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HISTORY /COMMAND}
\label{sec:ADM:HISTORY:COMMAND:help}
\index{ADM HISTORY /COMMAND option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                 +blue{/COMMAND} CubeId
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /COMMAND     +blue{Display parent commands of the named cube in the terminal}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,none,anyset) *                    +blue{The starting point cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{IMPORT}
\label{sec:ADM:IMPORT:help}
\index{ADM IMPORT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax   [ADM\]+blue{IMPORT} [Directory|FilePattern] [+blue{/HDU} Number] [+blue{/MAPPING}]
                     [+blue{/CLASS}] [+blue{/PARSE} Separator] [+blue{/SORT} Mode] [+blue{/VERBOSE}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                     +blue{Import files into the DAG}

  With a file pattern as argument (e.g. raw/*{.lmv|.fits}), import
  files using this pattern (pattern is assumed relative from current
  directory, if relevant).

  With a directory name as argument, import all files (*.*, only Gildas
  Data Format or FITS format files are imported) from this directory
  (no recursion).

  Several arguments can be present, for example:
    CUBE> import file1.fits file2.fits
  but also when invoking CUBE from the shell, e.g.
    shell> cube import *
  where the shell replaces the wilcard with all the matching files
  before executing CUBE.

  Without argument, import files from the RAW directory(ies).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (unlimited) TARGET     +blue{Import target, a directory or a File Pattern}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /HDU                               +blue{Specify the FITS HDU to be imported}
  /MAPPING            +blue{Import MAPPING files with flags based on extension}
  /CLASS                +blue{Import CLASS files with flags based on extension}
  /PARSE                  +blue{Split the file base name into family and flags}
  /SORT                      +blue{Specify the sorting order of imported files}
  /VERBOSE                  +blue{Indicate which files are imported or skipped}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{IMPORT /HDU}
\label{sec:ADM:IMPORT:HDU:help}
\index{ADM IMPORT /HDU option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                     +blue{/HDU} Number
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /HDU                               +blue{Specify the FITS HDU to be imported}

  Use * to import all possible images or cubes. Default is 1 (Primary
  HDU only).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) HDU NUMBER                               +blue{FITS HDU number}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{IMPORT /MAPPING}
\label{sec:ADM:IMPORT:MAPPING:help}
\index{ADM IMPORT /MAPPING option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/MAPPING}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MAPPING            +blue{Import MAPPING files with flags based on extension}

  This option is ignored if the file header provides its own flags.

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{IMPORT /CLASS}
\label{sec:ADM:IMPORT:CLASS:help}
\index{ADM IMPORT /CLASS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/CLASS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CLASS                +blue{Import CLASS files with flags based on extension}

  This option is ignored if the file header provides its own flags.

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{IMPORT /PARSE}
\label{sec:ADM:IMPORT:PARSE:help}
\index{ADM IMPORT /PARSE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                +blue{/PARSE} Separator
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PARSE                  +blue{Split the file base name into family and flags}

  The computed flags are ignored if the file header provides its own
  flags. Without this option, the whole base name is used as family
  name.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) SEPARATOR   +blue{Single character separator in file base name}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{IMPORT /SORT}
\label{sec:ADM:IMPORT:SORT:help}
\index{ADM IMPORT /SORT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/SORT} Mode
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SORT                      +blue{Specify the sorting order of imported files}

  Without this option, sorting is done in chronological order.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) MODE                                       +blue{Sorting mode}
     Possible values: NONE, CHRONOLOGICAL or ALPHABETICAL

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{IMPORT /VERBOSE}
\label{sec:ADM:IMPORT:VERBOSE:help}
\index{ADM IMPORT /VERBOSE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/VERBOSE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /VERBOSE                  +blue{Indicate which files are imported or skipped}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{LIST}
\label{sec:ADM:LIST:help}
\index{ADM LIST command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax       [ADM\]+blue{LIST} [cube] [+blue{/INDEX} IndexName] [+blue{/TOC} topic] [+blue{/PAGE}]
                        [+blue{/COLUMNS} col1 col2 ... coln] [+blue{/FILE} OutputFile]
                                                     [+blue{/VARIABLE} varname]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract        +blue{List the cubes in the default index or the given index}

  LIST is used for a quick look to cube headers, in a more or less
  detailed format. A medium-sized format is used by default, this can
  be changed with option /COLUMNS. If the list is too large it can be
  displayed page by page with option /PAGE. The list can be output to
  an ASCII file with option /FILE.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,none,anyset) *                    +blue{Cube identifier pattern}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INDEX                         +blue{Override the default index to be listed}
  /TOC                                    +blue{Table Of Contents of the index}
  /PAGE                                            +blue{Page through the list}
  /COLUMNS                                   +blue{Define columns to be listed}
  /FILE                               +blue{Define an output file for the list}
  /VARIABLE       +blue{Define the name of the SIC variable containing the TOC}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LIST /INDEX}
\label{sec:ADM:LIST:INDEX:help}
\index{ADM LIST /INDEX option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                +blue{/INDEX} IndexName
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INDEX                         +blue{Override the default index to be listed}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) INDEXNAME                +blue{Name of the index to be listed}
     Possible values: DAG or CURRENT

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LIST /TOC}
\label{sec:ADM:LIST:TOC:help}
\index{ADM LIST /TOC option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/TOC} topic
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /TOC                                    +blue{Table Of Contents of the index}

  A summary of the different values of each topic is made, plus a final
  summary of all the combinations (setups).By default, all topics are
  used. The table of contents is also saved in a SIC structure. The
  default name for the structure is TOC%, this can be changed by using
  the option /VARIABLE. The content of the structure is updated after
  each call to the command LIST /TOC. One must take care that
  subsequent calls to FIND can lead to values in TOC% that are
  inconsistent with the actual index.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (unlimited) TOPIC                     +blue{Topic(s) over which build TOC}
     Possible values: SOURCE, LINE, OBSERV, ORIGIN, FAMILY or FLAGS

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LIST /PAGE}
\label{sec:ADM:LIST:PAGE:help}
\index{ADM LIST /PAGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/PAGE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PAGE                                            +blue{Page through the list}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LIST /COLUMNS}
\label{sec:ADM:LIST:COLUMNS:help}
\index{ADM LIST /COLUMNS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                     +blue{/COLUMNS} col1 col2 ... coln
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /COLUMNS                                   +blue{Define columns to be listed}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (unlimited) COLUMN                           +blue{Column(s) to be listed}
     Possible values: ENTRY, IDENTIFIER, PARENTS, CHILDREN, TWINS, UNIT,
     SOURCE, PROJTYPE, L0, M0, PROJANGLE, SPALINC, SPAMINC, LINE,
     SPEFREQVAL, SPEFREQINC, SPEVELOVAL, BMAJOR, BMINOR, BPA,
     OBSERVATORY, LOCATION, ORDER, ACCESS, ORIGIN, FAMILY, FLAGS,
     CUBEID, TYPE, VARIABLE, SEPARATOR, HISTORY, MEMSIZE, DISKSIZE,
     DATASIZE, DATATYPE, DEFAULT, BEAM, PROJECTION, GRAPH, SPECTRAL,
     SPATIAL, TUPLE, SIZE or CURRENT

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LIST /FILE}
\label{sec:ADM:LIST:FILE:help}
\index{ADM LIST /FILE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                +blue{/FILE} OutputFile
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FILE                               +blue{Define an output file for the list}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) OUTPUTFILE           +blue{Name of the file to store the list}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LIST /VARIABLE}
\label{sec:ADM:LIST:VARIABLE:help}
\index{ADM LIST /VARIABLE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/VARIABLE} varname
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /VARIABLE       +blue{Define the name of the SIC variable containing the TOC}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VARNAME       +blue{Name of the SIC variable to store the TOC}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{MEMORY}
\label{sec:ADM:MEMORY:help}
\index{ADM MEMORY command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    [ADM\]+blue{MEMORY}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                 +blue{Display the current memory and disk footprint}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{REMOVE}
\label{sec:ADM:REMOVE:help}
\index{ADM REMOVE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                        [ADM\]+blue{REMOVE} [cube] [+blue{/INDEX} [IndexName]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                    +blue{Remove a cube from the DAG}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,none,anyset) *                                   +blue{[CubeID]}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INDEX                    +blue{Remove all cubes from default or named index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{REMOVE /INDEX}
\label{sec:ADM:REMOVE:INDEX:help}
\index{ADM REMOVE /INDEX option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                              +blue{/INDEX} [IndexName]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INDEX                    +blue{Remove all cubes from default or named index}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) INDEXNAME                +blue{Name of the index to be removed}
     Possible values: DAG or CURRENT

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{SNAPSHOT}
\label{sec:ADM:SNAPSHOT:help}
\index{ADM SNAPSHOT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                          [ADM\]+blue{SNAPSHOT} [+blue{/KEEP}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                    +blue{Save the current DAG structure to the disk}

  Perform a snapshot (from memory to disk) of the relevant buffers for
  later reuse in a new CUBE session. In details:

  1) memory-only cubes (i.e. created during the session in memory mode)
  are dumped in the TMP directory under an arbitrary name (based on
  their identifier and access mode). Other cubes (RAW and RED cubes)
  are not dumped as they are disk files;

  2) the DAG is saved on disk (name cube.dag) in the TMP directory.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /KEEP                                            +blue{Keep the data buffers}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SNAPSHOT /KEEP}
\label{sec:ADM:SNAPSHOT:KEEP:help}
\index{ADM SNAPSHOT /KEEP option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/KEEP}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /KEEP                                            +blue{Keep the data buffers}

  Keep the data buffers. Default is to free them, they will be reloaded
  from disk if relevant.

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{UNDO}
\label{sec:ADM:UNDO:help}
\index{ADM UNDO command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                     [ADM\]+blue{UNDO} [FirstCommandID] [LastCommandID]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                     +blue{Undo a command and remove it from history}

  Without argument, undo the last command (i.e. remove the command from
  the history and delete the products which were created).

  With a positive identifier as argument, undo the command according to
  its ID. With a range of identifiers as arguments, undo the commands
  from last to first.

  With a negative position as argument, undo the command according to
  its position from the end (0=last, -1=before last, etc).

 Examples:
    CUBE> UNDO      ! Undo last command in HISTORY
    CUBE> UNDO 10   ! Undo command #10 in HISTORY
    CUBE> UNDO 7 10 ! Undo commands #10 #9 #8 #7 in HISTORY
    CUBE> UNDO 0    ! Undo last command in HISTORY
    CUBE> UNDO -1   ! Undo before last command in HISTORY

  It is not possible to undo a command whose output products where used
  as inputs to other commands.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) COMMAND                                 +blue{[FirstCommandID]}
  #2 (optional) COMMAND                                  +blue{[LastCommandID]}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{UPDATE}
\label{sec:ADM:UPDATE:help}
\index{ADM UPDATE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                         [ADM\]+blue{UPDATE} [cube] [+blue{/FAMILY} NewFamily]
                 [+blue{/FLAGS} [operator]flag1,...,flagN] [+blue{/INDEX} [IndexName]]
                                    [+blue{/SET} Order] [+blue{/AXSET} Xnum Ynum Cnum]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                               +blue{Update family name and/or flags}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,header,anyset) *                       +blue{Cube to be updated}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FAMILY                                        +blue{Specify new family name}
  /FLAGS                                       +blue{Add, set, or remove flags}
  /INDEX                    +blue{Update all cubes from default or named index}
  /SET                  +blue{Force the cube to be considered as the given set}
  /AXSET                          +blue{Specify the X Y C axes by their number}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UPDATE /FAMILY}
\label{sec:ADM:UPDATE:FAMILY:help}
\index{ADM UPDATE /FAMILY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/FAMILY} NewFamily
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FAMILY                                        +blue{Specify new family name}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) NEWFAMILY                                +blue{New family name}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UPDATE /FLAGS}
\label{sec:ADM:UPDATE:FLAGS:help}
\index{ADM UPDATE /FLAGS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                +blue{/FLAGS} [operator]flag1,...,flagN
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FLAGS                                       +blue{Add, set, or remove flags}

  See argument help for complete syntax.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FLAG         +blue{List of flags to be added, set, or removed}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UPDATE /INDEX}
\label{sec:ADM:UPDATE:INDEX:help}
\index{ADM UPDATE /INDEX option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                              +blue{/INDEX} [IndexName]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INDEX                    +blue{Update all cubes from default or named index}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) INDEXNAME                +blue{Name of the index to be udpated}
     Possible values: DAG or CURRENT

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UPDATE /SET}
\label{sec:ADM:UPDATE:SET:help}
\index{ADM UPDATE /SET option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/SET} Order
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SET                  +blue{Force the cube to be considered as the given set}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ORDER                                        +blue{Order name}
     Possible values: IMAGE or SPECTRUM

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UPDATE /AXSET}
\label{sec:ADM:UPDATE:AXSET:help}
\index{ADM UPDATE /AXSET option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                           +blue{/AXSET} Xnum Ynum Cnum
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /AXSET                          +blue{Specify the X Y C axes by their number}

  Force the IL IM IC axes to specified values. Only 1 2 3 (i.e. cube is
  a native image set) or 3 1 2 (i.e. native spectrum set) are
  supported.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) XNUM                          +blue{Axis to become new X axis}
  #2 (mandatory) YNUM                          +blue{Axis to become new Y axis}
  #3 (mandatory) CNUM                          +blue{Axis to become new C axis}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{VERIFY}
\label{sec:ADM:VERIFY:help}
\index{ADM VERIFY command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                             [ADM\]+blue{VERIFY} [cube]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                    +blue{Verify if a FITS header is CUBE-conformant}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,header,anyset) *                                 +blue{[CubeID]}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\section{EDIT Language On-Line Help}
\label{sec:EDIT:help}
\index{EDIT command list}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  EDIT\                                          +blue{Commands to edit a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  ABORT                                      +blue{Abort the editing of a cube}
  COPY                                +blue{Copy part of a cube header or data}
  CLOSE                                     +blue{Close a cube in editing mode}
  DUMP                             +blue{dump cube header onto a SIC structure}
  GET         +blue{Get data or header information from a cube in editing mode}
  GLIMPSE                   +blue{Glimpse the header of a cube in editing mode}
  OPEN                                           +blue{Open a cube for editing}
  PUT                           +blue{Put information into a cube being edited}
  SPLIT                              +blue{Split a cube into individual images}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{ABORT}
\label{sec:EDIT:ABORT:help}
\index{EDIT ABORT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            [EDIT\]+blue{ABORT} [newid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                   +blue{Abort the editing of a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) NEWID                                 +blue{Editing Identifier}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{COPY}
\label{sec:EDIT:COPY:help}
\index{EDIT COPY command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax [EDIT\]+blue{COPY} [id] [+blue{/ALL}] [+blue{/HEADER}] [+blue{/DATA}] [+blue{/FROM} [referenceid]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                            +blue{Copy part of a cube header or data}

  This command uses an additive algorithm. It does nothing bydefault.
  The user has to explicitly define which part of thecube it wants to
  copy by raising the corresponding option.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) ID                                     +blue{Edited Identifier}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ALL                                      +blue{Copy the header and the data}
  /HEADER                                                +blue{Copy the header}
  /DATA                                                    +blue{Copy the data}
  /FROM                           +blue{Define the reference cube to be copied}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COPY /ALL}
\label{sec:EDIT:COPY:ALL:help}
\index{EDIT COPY /ALL option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                            +blue{/ALL}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ALL                                      +blue{Copy the header and the data}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COPY /HEADER}
\label{sec:EDIT:COPY:HEADER:help}
\index{EDIT COPY /HEADER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                         +blue{/HEADER}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /HEADER                                                +blue{Copy the header}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COPY /DATA}
\label{sec:EDIT:COPY:DATA:help}
\index{EDIT COPY /DATA option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/DATA}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DATA                                                    +blue{Copy the data}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COPY /FROM}
\label{sec:EDIT:COPY:FROM:help}
\index{EDIT COPY /FROM option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                             +blue{/FROM} [referenceid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FROM                           +blue{Define the reference cube to be copied}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,read,anyset) *                +blue{Cube id from which to copy}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{CLOSE}
\label{sec:EDIT:CLOSE:help}
\index{EDIT CLOSE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax             [EDIT\]+blue{CLOSE} [newid] [+blue{/AS} family[:flag1,...,flagn]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                  +blue{Close a cube in editing mode}

  By default the family name of the output cube is the same as the
  Editing Id (newid) and its flags are "edited,cube" for cubes created
  from scratch (no /LIKE), or "edited" followed by the original flags
  for cubes created as a copy (/LIKE). This can be customized by using
  option /AS.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) NEWID                                 +blue{Editing Identifier}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /AS                     +blue{Define the identifier of the cube being closed}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CLOSE /AS}
\label{sec:EDIT:CLOSE:AS:help}
\index{EDIT CLOSE /AS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                    +blue{/AS} family[:flag1,...,flagn]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /AS                     +blue{Define the identifier of the cube being closed}

  Set the family name and optionally the flags of the output cube. To
  consult the list of all available flags consult ADM\FLAGLIST
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) IDENTIFIER                               +blue{New identifier}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{DUMP}
\label{sec:EDIT:DUMP:help}
\index{EDIT DUMP command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                             [EDIT\]+blue{DUMP} [cube] [+blue{/FORMAT} format]
                                     [+blue{/INTO} varname [scope [overwrite]]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                         +blue{dump cube header onto a SIC structure}

  Header can be dumped into a variable in 3 formats (see option
  /FORMAT). Editing the dumped header has no Effect on the actual cube
  header. If option /INTO is not given the parent structure will be
  called EDITDUMP
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,header,imaset/speset) *      +blue{Cube from which fetch header}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FORMAT                   +blue{Define the format of the header to be dumped}
  /INTO                      +blue{Define the SIC variable name and its status}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DUMP /FORMAT}
\label{sec:EDIT:DUMP:FORMAT:help}
\index{EDIT DUMP /FORMAT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/FORMAT} format
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FORMAT                   +blue{Define the format of the header to be dumped}

  The 3 available formats are: GDF, a representation of the GDF file
  format header; FITS a representation of the FITS header; CUBE a
  minimalist representation of the internal header. Formats FITS and
  GDF are only available for files that are FITS and GDF respectively.
  If option is not given default format is CUBE.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FORMAT                                                 +blue{}
     Possible values: CUBE, FITS or GDF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DUMP /INTO}
\label{sec:EDIT:DUMP:INTO:help}
\index{EDIT DUMP /INTO option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                               +blue{/INTO} varname [scope [overwrite]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INTO                      +blue{Define the SIC variable name and its status}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VARNAME                                   +blue{Variable name}
  #2 (optional) SCOPE                        +blue{Variable is global or local}
     Possible values: GLOBAL or LOCAL
  #3 (optional) OVERWRITE       +blue{Overwrite previous variable of same name}
     Possible values: YES or NO

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{GET}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:help}
\index{EDIT GET command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax          [EDIT\]+blue{GET} [newid] [+blue{/INTO} varname [scope [overwrite]]]
                [+blue{/AXIS} axtype relative|absolute [unit]] [+blue{/SHAPE}] [+blue{/UNIT}]
                  [+blue{/EXTREMA}] [+blue{/NOISE}] [+blue{/SPATIALFRAME}] [+blue{/SOURCE}] [+blue{/PTYPE}]
               [+blue{/PCENTER}] [+blue{/PANGLE}] [+blue{/BEAM}] [+blue{/SPECTRALFRAME}] [+blue{/VELOCITY}]
           [+blue{/REDSHIFT}] [+blue{/LINE}] [+blue{/FREQUENCY}] [+blue{/WAVELENGTH}] [+blue{/OBSERVATORY}]
                  [+blue{/ID}] [+blue{/TUPLE}] [+blue{/PARENTS}] [+blue{/CHILDREN}] [+blue{/TWINS}] [+blue{/ZERO}]
            [+blue{/FIRST}] [+blue{/LAST}] [+blue{/NEXT}] [+blue{/PREVIOUS}] [+blue{/AFTERLAST}] [+blue{/CURRENT}]
                          [+blue{/ENTRY} ientry] [+blue{/PIXEL} lpos mpos type [unit]]
                                 [+blue{/CHANNEL} velocity type [unit]] [+blue{/CUBE}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract    +blue{Get data or header information from a cube in editing mode}

  Values gotten onto variables are intended for information. To change
  the values in a opened cube command EDIT\PUT  must be used. If option
  /INTO is not used the information gotten will be stored in a master
  structure called EDITGET
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) NEWID                                 +blue{Editing Identifier}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INTO                      +blue{Define the SIC variable name and its status}
  /AXIS                          +blue{Define axis to be fetched from the cube}
  /SHAPE                           +blue{Fetch Shape of a cube into a variable}
  /UNIT                             +blue{Fetch Unit of a cube into a variable}
  /EXTREMA                       +blue{Fetch Extrema of a cube into a variable}
  /NOISE                           +blue{Fetch Noise of a cube into a variable}
  /SPATIALFRAME            +blue{Fetch Spatial frame of a cube into a variable}
  /SOURCE                         +blue{Fetch Source of a cube into a variable}
  /PTYPE                      +blue{Fetch Proj. Type of a cube into a variable}
  /PCENTER                  +blue{Fetch Proj. Center of a cube into a variable}
  /PANGLE                    +blue{Fetch Proj. Angle of a cube into a variable}
  /BEAM                             +blue{Fetch Beam of a cube into a variable}
  /SPECTRALFRAME          +blue{Fetch Spectral frame of a cube into a variable}
  /VELOCITY                     +blue{Fetch Velocity of a cube into a variable}
  /REDSHIFT                     +blue{Fetch Redshift of a cube into a variable}
  /LINE                             +blue{Fetch Line of a cube into a variable}
  /FREQUENCY                   +blue{Fetch Frequency of a cube into a variable}
  /WAVELENGTH                 +blue{Fetch Wavelength of a cube into a variable}
  /OBSERVATORY               +blue{Fetch Observatory of a cube into a variable}
  /ID                                 +blue{Fetch Id of a cube into a variable}
  /TUPLE                           +blue{Fetch Tuple of a cube into a variable}
  /PARENTS                       +blue{Fetch Parents of a cube into a variable}
  /CHILDREN                     +blue{Fetch Children of a cube into a variable}
  /TWINS                           +blue{Fetch Twins of a cube into a variable}
  /ZERO                                 +blue{Get the ZERO entry from the cube}
  /FIRST                               +blue{Get the FIRST entry from the cube}
  /LAST                                 +blue{Get the LAST entry from the cube}
  /NEXT                                 +blue{Get the NEXT entry from the cube}
  /PREVIOUS                         +blue{Get the PREVIOUS entry from the cube}
  /AFTERLAST                       +blue{Get the AFTERLAST entry from the cube}
  /CURRENT                           +blue{Get the CURRENT entry from the cube}
  /ENTRY                                +blue{Get the i-th entry from the cube}
  /PIXEL                   +blue{Define the position of the pixel to be gotten}
  /CHANNEL                                   +blue{Get a channel from the cube}
  /CUBE                                                +blue{Get the full cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /INTO}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:INTO:help}
\index{EDIT GET /INTO option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                               +blue{/INTO} varname [scope [overwrite]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INTO                      +blue{Define the SIC variable name and its status}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VARNAME                                   +blue{Variable name}
  #2 (optional) SCOPE                        +blue{Variable is global or local}
     Possible values: GLOBAL or LOCAL
  #3 (optional) OVERWRITE       +blue{Overwrite previous variable of same name}
     Possible values: YES or NO

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /AXIS}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:AXIS:help}
\index{EDIT GET /AXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                           +blue{/AXIS} axtype relative|absolute [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /AXIS                          +blue{Define axis to be fetched from the cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) AXTYPE                                        +blue{Axis type}
     Possible values: axtype, VELOCITY, FREQUENCY, REDSHIFT, WAVELENGTH,
     IMAGEFREQ, L or M
  #2 (mandatory) COORTYPE          +blue{Coordinate type, relative or absolute}
     Possible values: RELATIVE or ABSOLUTE
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                       +blue{Unit for axis}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /SHAPE}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:SHAPE:help}
\index{EDIT GET /SHAPE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/SHAPE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SHAPE                           +blue{Fetch Shape of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%SHAPE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /UNIT}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:UNIT:help}
\index{EDIT GET /UNIT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/UNIT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /UNIT                             +blue{Fetch Unit of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%UNIT

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /EXTREMA}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:EXTREMA:help}
\index{EDIT GET /EXTREMA option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/EXTREMA}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /EXTREMA                       +blue{Fetch Extrema of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%EXTREMA

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /NOISE}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:NOISE:help}
\index{EDIT GET /NOISE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/NOISE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NOISE                           +blue{Fetch Noise of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%NOISE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /SPATIALFRAME}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:SPATIALFRAME:help}
\index{EDIT GET /SPATIALFRAME option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/SPATIALFRAME}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SPATIALFRAME            +blue{Fetch Spatial frame of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%SPATIALFRAME

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /SOURCE}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:SOURCE:help}
\index{EDIT GET /SOURCE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                         +blue{/SOURCE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SOURCE                         +blue{Fetch Source of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%SOURCE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /PTYPE}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:PTYPE:help}
\index{EDIT GET /PTYPE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/PTYPE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PTYPE                      +blue{Fetch Proj. Type of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%PTYPE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /PCENTER}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:PCENTER:help}
\index{EDIT GET /PCENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/PCENTER}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PCENTER                  +blue{Fetch Proj. Center of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%PCENTER

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /PANGLE}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:PANGLE:help}
\index{EDIT GET /PANGLE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                         +blue{/PANGLE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PANGLE                    +blue{Fetch Proj. Angle of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%PANGLE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /BEAM}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:BEAM:help}
\index{EDIT GET /BEAM option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/BEAM}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BEAM                             +blue{Fetch Beam of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%BEAM

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /SPECTRALFRAME}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:SPECTRALFRAME:help}
\index{EDIT GET /SPECTRALFRAME option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/SPECTRALFRAME}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SPECTRALFRAME          +blue{Fetch Spectral frame of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%SPECTRALFRAME

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /VELOCITY}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:VELOCITY:help}
\index{EDIT GET /VELOCITY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/VELOCITY}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /VELOCITY                     +blue{Fetch Velocity of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%VELOCITY

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /REDSHIFT}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:REDSHIFT:help}
\index{EDIT GET /REDSHIFT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/REDSHIFT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /REDSHIFT                     +blue{Fetch Redshift of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%REDSHIFT

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /LINE}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:LINE:help}
\index{EDIT GET /LINE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/LINE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LINE                             +blue{Fetch Line of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%LINE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /FREQUENCY}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:FREQUENCY:help}
\index{EDIT GET /FREQUENCY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/FREQUENCY}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FREQUENCY                   +blue{Fetch Frequency of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%FREQUENCY

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /WAVELENGTH}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:WAVELENGTH:help}
\index{EDIT GET /WAVELENGTH option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                     +blue{/WAVELENGTH}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /WAVELENGTH                 +blue{Fetch Wavelength of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%WAVELENGTH

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /OBSERVATORY}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:OBSERVATORY:help}
\index{EDIT GET /OBSERVATORY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/OBSERVATORY}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /OBSERVATORY               +blue{Fetch Observatory of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%OBSERVATORY

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /ID}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:ID:help}
\index{EDIT GET /ID option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                             +blue{/ID}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ID                                 +blue{Fetch Id of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%ID

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /TUPLE}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:TUPLE:help}
\index{EDIT GET /TUPLE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/TUPLE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /TUPLE                           +blue{Fetch Tuple of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%TUPLE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /PARENTS}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:PARENTS:help}
\index{EDIT GET /PARENTS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/PARENTS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PARENTS                       +blue{Fetch Parents of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%PARENTS

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /CHILDREN}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:CHILDREN:help}
\index{EDIT GET /CHILDREN option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/CHILDREN}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CHILDREN                     +blue{Fetch Children of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%CHILDREN

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /TWINS}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:TWINS:help}
\index{EDIT GET /TWINS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/TWINS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /TWINS                           +blue{Fetch Twins of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  EDITGET%TWINS

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /ZERO}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:ZERO:help}
\index{EDIT GET /ZERO option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/ZERO}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ZERO                                 +blue{Get the ZERO entry from the cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /FIRST}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:FIRST:help}
\index{EDIT GET /FIRST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/FIRST}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FIRST                               +blue{Get the FIRST entry from the cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /LAST}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:LAST:help}
\index{EDIT GET /LAST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/LAST}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LAST                                 +blue{Get the LAST entry from the cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /NEXT}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:NEXT:help}
\index{EDIT GET /NEXT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/NEXT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NEXT                                 +blue{Get the NEXT entry from the cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /PREVIOUS}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:PREVIOUS:help}
\index{EDIT GET /PREVIOUS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/PREVIOUS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PREVIOUS                         +blue{Get the PREVIOUS entry from the cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /AFTERLAST}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:AFTERLAST:help}
\index{EDIT GET /AFTERLAST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/AFTERLAST}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /AFTERLAST                       +blue{Get the AFTERLAST entry from the cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /CURRENT}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:CURRENT:help}
\index{EDIT GET /CURRENT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/CURRENT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CURRENT                           +blue{Get the CURRENT entry from the cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /ENTRY}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:ENTRY:help}
\index{EDIT GET /ENTRY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/ENTRY} ientry
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ENTRY                                +blue{Get the i-th entry from the cube}

  Access is fixed when opening the cube for editing
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) IENTRY                        +blue{Entry number to be gotten}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /PIXEL}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:PIXEL:help}
\index{EDIT GET /PIXEL option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                    +blue{/PIXEL} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PIXEL                   +blue{Define the position of the pixel to be gotten}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /CHANNEL}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:CHANNEL:help}
\index{EDIT GET /CHANNEL option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CHANNEL} velocity type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CHANNEL                                   +blue{Get a channel from the cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VELOCITY                        +blue{Velocity of the channel}
  #2 (mandatory) TYPE +blue{Velocity is absolute or relative to systemic veloc}
     Possible values: Absolute or Relative
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                       +blue{Velocity unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GET /CUBE}
\label{sec:EDIT:GET:CUBE:help}
\index{EDIT GET /CUBE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/CUBE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CUBE                                                +blue{Get the full cube}

  Load the whole cube in the named variable. If the cube is an image
  set, its first plane and its spatial coordinates are also loaded in
  the RG buffer.

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{GLIMPSE}
\label{sec:EDIT:GLIMPSE:help}
\index{EDIT GLIMPSE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                          [EDIT\]+blue{GLIMPSE} [newid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                  +blue{Glimpse the header of a cube in editing mode}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) NEWID                                 +blue{Editing Identifier}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{OPEN}
\label{sec:EDIT:OPEN:help}
\index{EDIT OPEN command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax   [EDIT\]+blue{OPEN} newid [+blue{/LIKE} CUBE] [+blue{/DIMS} nl nm nc] [+blue{/INIT} value]
                                                         [+blue{/ACCESS} Order]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                       +blue{Open a cube for editing}

  Open a cube for editing under an editing identifier. If no identifier
  is given, list the currently open cubes. WARNING: there are no checks
  on the data or header modifications being done, proceed with care. If
  the header needs to be modified in a coherent way, please refer to
  command CUBE\MODIFY.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) NEWID                                 +blue{Editing Identifier}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIKE                               +blue{Open new cube like a previous cube}
  /DIMS                            +blue{Define the dimensions of the new cube}
  /INIT                      +blue{Define an initial value for the opened CUBE}
  /ACCESS                    +blue{Define the access for the cube to be opened}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) *,edited                              +blue{The new cube buffer}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{OPEN /LIKE}
\label{sec:EDIT:OPEN:LIKE:help}
\index{EDIT OPEN /LIKE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/LIKE} CUBE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIKE                               +blue{Open new cube like a previous cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,header,imaset/speset) *     +blue{Cube to be opened for edition}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{OPEN /DIMS}
\label{sec:EDIT:OPEN:DIMS:help}
\index{EDIT OPEN /DIMS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/DIMS} nl nm nc
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DIMS                            +blue{Define the dimensions of the new cube}

  If /DIMS and /LIKE are used the new dimensions are assumed to be
  centered on the references of the reference cube
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NL                           +blue{Number of pixels in L axis}
  #2 (optional) NM                            +blue{Number of pixels in M axis}
  #3 (optional) NC                                    +blue{Number of channels}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{OPEN /INIT}
\label{sec:EDIT:OPEN:INIT:help}
\index{EDIT OPEN /INIT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                     +blue{/INIT} value
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INIT                      +blue{Define an initial value for the opened CUBE}

  If option is ommited the default value is NaN. Copy is only allowed
  if option /LIKE is present and option /DIMS is not present.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VALUE                                     +blue{Initial value}
     Possible values: value, NaN or COPY

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{OPEN /ACCESS}
\label{sec:EDIT:OPEN:ACCESS:help}
\index{EDIT OPEN /ACCESS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/ACCESS} Order
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ACCESS                    +blue{Define the access for the cube to be opened}

  Default access is image
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ORDER                                        +blue{Order name}
     Possible values: IMAGE or SPECTRUM

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{PUT}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:help}
\index{EDIT PUT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                               [EDIT\]+blue{PUT} [newid] [+blue{/SOURCE} name]
                           [+blue{/SPATIALFRAME} frame [equinox]] [+blue{/PTYPE} type]
                    [+blue{/PCENTER} l0 m0 type [unit]] [+blue{/PANGLE} pang [paunit]]
               [+blue{/BEAM} major [minor [unit [pang [paunit]]]]] [+blue{/UNIT} name]
             [+blue{/NOISE} sigma rms] [+blue{/AXIS} name n ref val inc [unit [kind]]]
         [+blue{/AXNAMES} ax1 ... axn] [+blue{/OBSERVATORY} [+-]Name1 [... [+-]NameN]]
                      [+blue{/LINE} name] [+blue{/VELOCITY} value [unit [convention]]]
                                   [+blue{/REDSHIFT} value [unit [convention]]]
                                        [+blue{/FREQUENCY} rest [image [unit]]]
                 [+blue{/WAVELENGTH} rest [image [unit]]] [+blue{/SPECTRALFRAME} type]
               [+blue{/ZERO}] [+blue{/FIRST}] [+blue{/LAST}] [+blue{/NEXT}] [+blue{/PREVIOUS}] [+blue{/AFTERLAST}]
               [+blue{/CURRENT}] [+blue{/ENTRY} ientry] [+blue{/PIXEL} lpos mpos type [unit]]
                         [+blue{/CHANNEL} velocity type [unit]] [+blue{/FROM} varname]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                      +blue{Put information into a cube being edited}

  WARNING: there are no checks on the data or header modifications
  being done, proceed with care. If the header needs to be modified ina
  coherent way, please refer to command CUBE\MODIFY
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) NEWID                                 +blue{Editing Identifier}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SOURCE                                          +blue{Put a new source name}
  /SPATIALFRAME                        +blue{Put new Spatial frame information}
  /PTYPE                                       +blue{Put a new projection type}
  /PCENTER                                   +blue{Put a new projection center}
  /PANGLE                                     +blue{Put a new projection angle}
  /BEAM                                                   +blue{Put a new beam}
  /UNIT                                      +blue{Put a new unit for the cube}
  /NOISE                                            +blue{Put new noise values}
  /AXIS           +blue{Put a new axis description for one of the current axes}
  /AXNAMES                                  +blue{Put new names on cube's axes}
  /OBSERVATORY                           +blue{Put new observatory information}
  /LINE                                              +blue{Put a new line name}
  /VELOCITY                        +blue{Put new systemic velocity information}
  /REDSHIFT                        +blue{Put new systemic redshift information}
  /FREQUENCY                          +blue{Put new rest frequency information}
  /WAVELENGTH                        +blue{Put new rest wavelength information}
  /SPECTRALFRAME                      +blue{Put new spectral frame information}
  /ZERO                                 +blue{Put the ZERO entry into the cube}
  /FIRST                               +blue{Put the FIRST entry into the cube}
  /LAST                                 +blue{Put the LAST entry into the cube}
  /NEXT                                 +blue{Put the NEXT entry into the cube}
  /PREVIOUS                         +blue{Put the PREVIOUS entry into the cube}
  /AFTERLAST                       +blue{Put the AFTERLAST entry into the cube}
  /CURRENT                           +blue{Put the CURRENT entry into the cube}
  /ENTRY                          +blue{Define the entry to be put in the cube}
  /PIXEL                      +blue{Define the position of the pixel to be put}
  /CHANNEL                  +blue{Define the velocity of the channel to be put}
  /FROM                         +blue{Define from which variable we fetch data}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /SOURCE}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:SOURCE:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /SOURCE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/SOURCE} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SOURCE                                          +blue{Put a new source name}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                                        +blue{Source name}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /SPATIALFRAME}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:SPATIALFRAME:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /SPATIALFRAME option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/SPATIALFRAME} frame [equinox]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SPATIALFRAME                        +blue{Put new Spatial frame information}

  Frame can be Equatorial, Galactic, ICRS or Unknown
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) TYPE                              +blue{type of spatial frame}
     Possible values: UNKNOWN, EQUATORIAL, GALACTIC, HORIZONTAL or ICRS
  #2 (optional) EQUINOX      +blue{Equinox of the spatial frame, if equatorial}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /PTYPE}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:PTYPE:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /PTYPE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                     +blue{/PTYPE} type
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PTYPE                                       +blue{Put a new projection type}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) TYPE                                    +blue{Projection type}
     Possible values: GNOMONIC, ORTHOGRAPHIC, AZIMUTHAL, STEREOGRAPHIC,
     LAMBERT, AITOFF, RADIO, SFL, MOLLWEIDE, NCP or CARTESIAN

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /PCENTER}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:PCENTER:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /PCENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                      +blue{/PCENTER} l0 m0 type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PCENTER                                   +blue{Put a new projection center}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) L0                   +blue{l Coordinate for projection center}
  #2 (mandatory) M0                   +blue{m Coordinate for projection center}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: Absolute or Relative
  #4 (optional) UNIT                                  +blue{Unit for l0 and m0}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /PANGLE}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:PANGLE:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /PANGLE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                           +blue{/PANGLE} pang [paunit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PANGLE                                     +blue{Put a new projection angle}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) PANG                           +blue{Projection position angle}
  #2 (optional) PAUNIT                               +blue{Position angle unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian or degree

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /BEAM}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:BEAM:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /BEAM option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                      +blue{/BEAM} major [minor [unit [pang [paunit]]]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BEAM                                                   +blue{Put a new beam}

  If only the major axis is given the beam is assumed circular and
  hence minor = major
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) MAJOR                                   +blue{Beam major axis}
  #2 (optional) MINOR                                    +blue{Beam minor axis}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                      +blue{Beam axes unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec
  #4 (optional) PANG                                 +blue{Beam position angle}
  #5 (optional) PAUNIT                               +blue{Position angle unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian or degree

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /UNIT}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:UNIT:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /UNIT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/UNIT} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /UNIT                                      +blue{Put a new unit for the cube}

  Unit can be set to any 12 character string, but only recognized units
  are supported
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                                          +blue{Unit name}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /NOISE}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:NOISE:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /NOISE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                +blue{/NOISE} sigma rms
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NOISE                                            +blue{Put new noise values}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SIGMA                                 +blue{Theoretical noise}
  #2 (mandatory) RMS                                      +blue{Measured noise}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /AXIS}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:AXIS:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /AXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                          +blue{/AXIS} name n ref val inc [unit [kind]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /AXIS           +blue{Put a new axis description for one of the current axes}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                                          +blue{Axis name}
  #2 (mandatory) N                            +blue{number of elements in axis}
  #3 (mandatory) REF                                +blue{Axis reference point}
  #4 (mandatory) VAL                       +blue{Axis value at reference point}
  #5 (mandatory) INC                                      +blue{Axis increment}
  #6 (optional) UNIT                                +blue{Unit for val and inc}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     Unknown
  #7 (optional) KIND                                      +blue{Axis unit kind}
     Possible values: UV, FOV, POSANGLE, BEAM, FREQUENCY, VELOCITY,
     WAVELENGTH, CHANNEL, PIXEL, DISTANCE or UNKNOWN

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /AXNAMES}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:AXNAMES:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /AXNAMES option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/AXNAMES} ax1 ... axn
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /AXNAMES                                  +blue{Put new names on cube's axes}

  The total number of arguments should match the number of axes in the
  cube, as each argument corresponds to one of the axes in the cube
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) AX1                                 +blue{Name for first axis}
  #2 (unlimited) AXN              +blue{"*" or "=" mean previous value is kept}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /OBSERVATORY}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:OBSERVATORY:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /OBSERVATORY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                          +blue{/OBSERVATORY} [+-]Name1 [... [+-]NameN]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /OBSERVATORY                           +blue{Put new observatory information}

  Telescopes can be added or removed by using the characters + or - in
  front of their names. If not + or - is added before the name a + is
  assumed. e.g.:
    PUT /OBSERVATORY 30m        ! Adds 30m telescope
    PUT /OBSERVATORY -ALMA +ACA ! Removes ALMA and adds ACA
  Note that the telescopes are implicitly sorted in alphabetical order.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME1          +blue{First observatory to be added or removed}
  #2 (unlimited) NAMEN          +blue{N-eth observatory to be added or removed}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /LINE}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:LINE:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /LINE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/LINE} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LINE                                              +blue{Put a new line name}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LINE                                          +blue{Line name}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /VELOCITY}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:VELOCITY:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /VELOCITY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                             +blue{/VELOCITY} value [unit [convention]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /VELOCITY                        +blue{Put new systemic velocity information}

  Systemic redshift is updated accordingly
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VALUE                                   +blue{Reference value}
  #2 (optional) UNIT                                                +blue{Unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s
  #3 (optional) CONVENTION                               +blue{Convention type}
     Possible values: Unknown, Radio, Optical or Relativ

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /REDSHIFT}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:REDSHIFT:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /REDSHIFT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                             +blue{/REDSHIFT} value [unit [convention]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /REDSHIFT                        +blue{Put new systemic redshift information}

  Systemic velocity is updated accordingly
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VALUE                                   +blue{Reference value}
  #2 (optional) UNIT                                                +blue{Unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     Unknown
  #3 (optional) CONVENTION                               +blue{Convention type}
     Possible values: Unknown, Radio, Optical or Relativ

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /FREQUENCY}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:FREQUENCY:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /FREQUENCY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                  +blue{/FREQUENCY} rest [image [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FREQUENCY                          +blue{Put new rest frequency information}

  Spectral increments and wavelengths updated accordingly, values in
  current frequency unit
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SIGNAL                          +blue{Rest frame signal value}
  #2 (optional) IMAGE                             +blue{Rest frame image value}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                                +blue{Unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     Hz

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /WAVELENGTH}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:WAVELENGTH:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /WAVELENGTH option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                 +blue{/WAVELENGTH} rest [image [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /WAVELENGTH                        +blue{Put new rest wavelength information}

  Spectral increments and frequencies updated accordingly, values in mm
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SIGNAL                          +blue{Rest frame signal value}
  #2 (optional) IMAGE                             +blue{Rest frame image value}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                                +blue{Unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     m or Ang

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /SPECTRALFRAME}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:SPECTRALFRAME:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /SPECTRALFRAME option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                             +blue{/SPECTRALFRAME} type
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SPECTRALFRAME                      +blue{Put new spectral frame information}

  WARNING: Systemic velocity and redshift are not updated accordingly
  when the spectral frame is changed
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) TYPE                                +blue{Spectral frame type}
     Possible values: Unk, LSRK, Hel, Obs or Ear

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /ZERO}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:ZERO:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /ZERO option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/ZERO}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ZERO                                 +blue{Put the ZERO entry into the cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /FIRST}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:FIRST:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /FIRST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/FIRST}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FIRST                               +blue{Put the FIRST entry into the cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /LAST}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:LAST:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /LAST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/LAST}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LAST                                 +blue{Put the LAST entry into the cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /NEXT}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:NEXT:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /NEXT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/NEXT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NEXT                                 +blue{Put the NEXT entry into the cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /PREVIOUS}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:PREVIOUS:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /PREVIOUS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/PREVIOUS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PREVIOUS                         +blue{Put the PREVIOUS entry into the cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /AFTERLAST}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:AFTERLAST:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /AFTERLAST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/AFTERLAST}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /AFTERLAST                       +blue{Put the AFTERLAST entry into the cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /CURRENT}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:CURRENT:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /CURRENT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/CURRENT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CURRENT                           +blue{Put the CURRENT entry into the cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /ENTRY}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:ENTRY:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /ENTRY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/ENTRY} ientry
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ENTRY                          +blue{Define the entry to be put in the cube}

  Access is fixed when opening the cube for editing
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) IENTRY                        +blue{Entry number to be gotten}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /PIXEL}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:PIXEL:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /PIXEL option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                    +blue{/PIXEL} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PIXEL                      +blue{Define the position of the pixel to be put}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /CHANNEL}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:CHANNEL:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /CHANNEL option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CHANNEL} velocity type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CHANNEL                  +blue{Define the velocity of the channel to be put}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VELOCITY                        +blue{Velocity of the channel}
  #2 (mandatory) TYPE +blue{Velocity is absolute or relative to systemic veloc}
     Possible values: Absolute or Relative
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                       +blue{Velocity unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PUT /FROM}
\label{sec:EDIT:PUT:FROM:help}
\index{EDIT PUT /FROM option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/FROM} varname
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FROM                         +blue{Define from which variable we fetch data}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VARNAME         +blue{Variable name containing data to be put}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{SPLIT}
\label{sec:EDIT:SPLIT:help}
\index{EDIT SPLIT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                             [EDIT\]+blue{SPLIT} [cube]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                           +blue{Split a cube into individual images}

  Split a cube in its frequency-velocity axis into individual images.

  WARNING: This command is a work around for complicated cases when
  complex set of images cannot be easily used in CUBE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) image            +blue{The extracted images (as many as needed)}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\section{GO Language On-Line Help}
\label{sec:GO:help}
\index{GO command list}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  GO\                      +blue{Commands to visualize or interact with a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  BIT                                          +blue{Interactive bit of a cube}
  HYPERBIT                                     +blue{Interactive bit of a cube}
  BROWSE                           +blue{Interactive browse of a cube spectrum}
  LOAD                                      +blue{load information from a cube}
  OLDLOAD                                +blue{Load a cube onto a sic variable}
  SHOW           +blue{Show combinations of cubes belonging to the same family}
  SPECTRUM                             +blue{Show a map of spectra from a cube}
  TOPOLOGY                +blue{Compute the topology of the region of interest}
  VIEW                                        +blue{Interactive view of a cube}
  HYPERVIEW                                   +blue{Interactive view of a cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{BIT}
\label{sec:GO:BIT:help}
\index{GO BIT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                 [GO\]+blue{BIT} [cube]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                     +blue{Interactive bit of a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset/speset) *                    +blue{Cube to be bited}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{HYPERBIT}
\label{sec:GO:HYPERBIT:help}
\index{GO HYPERBIT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                           [GO\]+blue{HYPERBIT} [cube] [+blue{/HEADER} ON|OFF]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                     +blue{Interactive bit of a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset/speset) *                    +blue{Cube to be bited}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /HEADER                            +blue{Switch the header display on or off}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HYPERBIT /HEADER}
\label{sec:GO:HYPERBIT:HEADER:help}
\index{GO HYPERBIT /HEADER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/HEADER} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /HEADER                            +blue{Switch the header display on or off}

  Default is ON.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{BROWSE}
\label{sec:GO:BROWSE:help}
\index{GO BROWSE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax               [GO\]+blue{BROWSE} [cube] [+blue{/PIXEL} lpos mpos type [unit]]
                                   [+blue{/CATALOG} File] [+blue{/INTERACTIVE} ON|OFF]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                         +blue{Interactive browse of a cube spectrum}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset/speset) *                   +blue{Cube to be viewed}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PIXEL                   +blue{Define the position of the pixel to be gotten}
  /CATALOG                         +blue{Supersede the line catalog to be used}
  /INTERACTIVE                     +blue{Switch the interactive mode on or off}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{BROWSE /PIXEL}
\label{sec:GO:BROWSE:PIXEL:help}
\index{GO BROWSE /PIXEL option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                    +blue{/PIXEL} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PIXEL                   +blue{Define the position of the pixel to be gotten}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{BROWSE /CATALOG}
\label{sec:GO:BROWSE:CATALOG:help}
\index{GO BROWSE /CATALOG option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/CATALOG} File
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CATALOG                         +blue{Supersede the line catalog to be used}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FILE                         +blue{The line catalog file name}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{BROWSE /INTERACTIVE}
\label{sec:GO:BROWSE:INTERACTIVE:help}
\index{GO BROWSE /INTERACTIVE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                             +blue{/INTERACTIVE} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INTERACTIVE                     +blue{Switch the interactive mode on or off}

  Default is ON.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{LOAD}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:help}
\index{GO LOAD command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax            [GO\]+blue{LOAD} [cube] [+blue{/INTO} varname [scope [overwrite]]]
                [+blue{/AXIS} axtype relative|absolute [unit]] [+blue{/SHAPE}] [+blue{/UNIT}]
                  [+blue{/EXTREMA}] [+blue{/NOISE}] [+blue{/SPATIALFRAME}] [+blue{/SOURCE}] [+blue{/PTYPE}]
               [+blue{/PCENTER}] [+blue{/PANGLE}] [+blue{/BEAM}] [+blue{/SPECTRALFRAME}] [+blue{/VELOCITY}]
           [+blue{/REDSHIFT}] [+blue{/LINE}] [+blue{/FREQUENCY}] [+blue{/WAVELENGTH}] [+blue{/OBSERVATORY}]
                          [+blue{/ID}] [+blue{/TUPLE}] [+blue{/PARENTS}] [+blue{/CHILDREN}] [+blue{/TWINS}]
             [+blue{/FIRST} [Access]] [+blue{/LAST} [Access]] [+blue{/ENTRY} ientry [access]]
          [+blue{/PIXEL} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/CHANNEL} velocity type [unit]]
                                                                 [+blue{/CUBE}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                  +blue{load information from a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset/speset) *                          +blue{Input cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INTO                      +blue{Define the SIC variable name and its status}
  /AXIS                          +blue{Define axis to be fetched from the cube}
  /SHAPE                           +blue{Fetch Shape of a cube into a variable}
  /UNIT                             +blue{Fetch Unit of a cube into a variable}
  /EXTREMA                       +blue{Fetch Extrema of a cube into a variable}
  /NOISE                           +blue{Fetch Noise of a cube into a variable}
  /SPATIALFRAME            +blue{Fetch Spatial frame of a cube into a variable}
  /SOURCE                         +blue{Fetch Source of a cube into a variable}
  /PTYPE                      +blue{Fetch Proj. Type of a cube into a variable}
  /PCENTER                  +blue{Fetch Proj. Center of a cube into a variable}
  /PANGLE                    +blue{Fetch Proj. Angle of a cube into a variable}
  /BEAM                             +blue{Fetch Beam of a cube into a variable}
  /SPECTRALFRAME          +blue{Fetch Spectral frame of a cube into a variable}
  /VELOCITY                     +blue{Fetch Velocity of a cube into a variable}
  /REDSHIFT                     +blue{Fetch Redshift of a cube into a variable}
  /LINE                             +blue{Fetch Line of a cube into a variable}
  /FREQUENCY                   +blue{Fetch Frequency of a cube into a variable}
  /WAVELENGTH                 +blue{Fetch Wavelength of a cube into a variable}
  /OBSERVATORY               +blue{Fetch Observatory of a cube into a variable}
  /ID                                 +blue{Fetch Id of a cube into a variable}
  /TUPLE                           +blue{Fetch Tuple of a cube into a variable}
  /PARENTS                       +blue{Fetch Parents of a cube into a variable}
  /CHILDREN                     +blue{Fetch Children of a cube into a variable}
  /TWINS                           +blue{Fetch Twins of a cube into a variable}
  /FIRST                               +blue{Get the FIRST entry from the cube}
  /LAST                                 +blue{Get the LAST entry from the cube}
  /ENTRY                                +blue{Get the i-th entry from the cube}
  /PIXEL                   +blue{Define the position of the pixel to be gotten}
  /CHANNEL                                   +blue{Get a channel from the cube}
  /CUBE                                                +blue{Get the full cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /INTO}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:INTO:help}
\index{GO LOAD /INTO option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                               +blue{/INTO} varname [scope [overwrite]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INTO                      +blue{Define the SIC variable name and its status}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VARNAME                                   +blue{Variable name}
  #2 (optional) SCOPE                        +blue{Variable is global or local}
     Possible values: GLOBAL or LOCAL
  #3 (optional) OVERWRITE       +blue{Overwrite previous variable of same name}
     Possible values: YES or NO

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /AXIS}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:AXIS:help}
\index{GO LOAD /AXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                           +blue{/AXIS} axtype relative|absolute [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /AXIS                          +blue{Define axis to be fetched from the cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) AXTYPE                                        +blue{Axis type}
     Possible values: axtype, VELOCITY, FREQUENCY, REDSHIFT, WAVELENGTH,
     IMAGEFREQ, L or M
  #2 (mandatory) COORTYPE          +blue{Coordinate type, relative or absolute}
     Possible values: RELATIVE or ABSOLUTE
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                       +blue{Unit for axis}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /SHAPE}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:SHAPE:help}
\index{GO LOAD /SHAPE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/SHAPE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SHAPE                           +blue{Fetch Shape of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%SHAPE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /UNIT}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:UNIT:help}
\index{GO LOAD /UNIT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/UNIT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /UNIT                             +blue{Fetch Unit of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%UNIT

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /EXTREMA}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:EXTREMA:help}
\index{GO LOAD /EXTREMA option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/EXTREMA}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /EXTREMA                       +blue{Fetch Extrema of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%EXTREMA

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /NOISE}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:NOISE:help}
\index{GO LOAD /NOISE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/NOISE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NOISE                           +blue{Fetch Noise of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%NOISE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /SPATIALFRAME}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:SPATIALFRAME:help}
\index{GO LOAD /SPATIALFRAME option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/SPATIALFRAME}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SPATIALFRAME            +blue{Fetch Spatial frame of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%SPATIALFRAME

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /SOURCE}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:SOURCE:help}
\index{GO LOAD /SOURCE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                         +blue{/SOURCE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SOURCE                         +blue{Fetch Source of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%SOURCE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /PTYPE}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:PTYPE:help}
\index{GO LOAD /PTYPE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/PTYPE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PTYPE                      +blue{Fetch Proj. Type of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%PTYPE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /PCENTER}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:PCENTER:help}
\index{GO LOAD /PCENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/PCENTER}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PCENTER                  +blue{Fetch Proj. Center of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%PCENTER

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /PANGLE}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:PANGLE:help}
\index{GO LOAD /PANGLE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                         +blue{/PANGLE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PANGLE                    +blue{Fetch Proj. Angle of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%PANGLE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /BEAM}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:BEAM:help}
\index{GO LOAD /BEAM option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/BEAM}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BEAM                             +blue{Fetch Beam of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%BEAM

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /SPECTRALFRAME}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:SPECTRALFRAME:help}
\index{GO LOAD /SPECTRALFRAME option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/SPECTRALFRAME}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SPECTRALFRAME          +blue{Fetch Spectral frame of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%SPECTRALFRAME

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /VELOCITY}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:VELOCITY:help}
\index{GO LOAD /VELOCITY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/VELOCITY}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /VELOCITY                     +blue{Fetch Velocity of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%VELOCITY

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /REDSHIFT}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:REDSHIFT:help}
\index{GO LOAD /REDSHIFT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/REDSHIFT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /REDSHIFT                     +blue{Fetch Redshift of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%REDSHIFT

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /LINE}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:LINE:help}
\index{GO LOAD /LINE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/LINE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LINE                             +blue{Fetch Line of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%LINE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /FREQUENCY}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:FREQUENCY:help}
\index{GO LOAD /FREQUENCY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/FREQUENCY}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FREQUENCY                   +blue{Fetch Frequency of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%FREQUENCY

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /WAVELENGTH}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:WAVELENGTH:help}
\index{GO LOAD /WAVELENGTH option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                     +blue{/WAVELENGTH}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /WAVELENGTH                 +blue{Fetch Wavelength of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%WAVELENGTH

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /OBSERVATORY}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:OBSERVATORY:help}
\index{GO LOAD /OBSERVATORY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/OBSERVATORY}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /OBSERVATORY               +blue{Fetch Observatory of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%OBSERVATORY

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /ID}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:ID:help}
\index{GO LOAD /ID option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                             +blue{/ID}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ID                                 +blue{Fetch Id of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%ID

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /TUPLE}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:TUPLE:help}
\index{GO LOAD /TUPLE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/TUPLE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /TUPLE                           +blue{Fetch Tuple of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%TUPLE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /PARENTS}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:PARENTS:help}
\index{GO LOAD /PARENTS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/PARENTS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PARENTS                       +blue{Fetch Parents of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%PARENTS

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /CHILDREN}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:CHILDREN:help}
\index{GO LOAD /CHILDREN option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/CHILDREN}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CHILDREN                     +blue{Fetch Children of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%CHILDREN

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /TWINS}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:TWINS:help}
\index{GO LOAD /TWINS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/TWINS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /TWINS                           +blue{Fetch Twins of a cube into a variable}

  If option /INTO is not given the default name for the variable is
  GOLOAD%TWINS

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /FIRST}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:FIRST:help}
\index{GO LOAD /FIRST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                 +blue{/FIRST} [Access]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FIRST                               +blue{Get the FIRST entry from the cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) ACCESS        +blue{In which order the cube should be accessed}
     Possible values: IMAGE or SPECTRUM

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /LAST}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:LAST:help}
\index{GO LOAD /LAST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/LAST} [Access]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LAST                                 +blue{Get the LAST entry from the cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) ACCESS        +blue{In which order the cube should be accessed}
     Possible values: IMAGE or SPECTRUM

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /ENTRY}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:ENTRY:help}
\index{GO LOAD /ENTRY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                          +blue{/ENTRY} ientry [access]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ENTRY                                +blue{Get the i-th entry from the cube}

  Default access is IMAGE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) IENTRY                        +blue{Entry number to be gotten}
  #2 (optional) ACCESS        +blue{In which order the cube should be accessed}
     Possible values: IMAGE or SPECTRUM

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /PIXEL}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:PIXEL:help}
\index{GO LOAD /PIXEL option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                    +blue{/PIXEL} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PIXEL                   +blue{Define the position of the pixel to be gotten}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /CHANNEL}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:CHANNEL:help}
\index{GO LOAD /CHANNEL option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CHANNEL} velocity type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CHANNEL                                   +blue{Get a channel from the cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VELOCITY                        +blue{Velocity of the channel}
  #2 (mandatory) TYPE +blue{Velocity is absolute or relative to systemic veloc}
     Possible values: Absolute or Relative
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                       +blue{Velocity unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LOAD /CUBE}
\label{sec:GO:LOAD:CUBE:help}
\index{GO LOAD /CUBE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/CUBE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CUBE                                                +blue{Get the full cube}

  Load the whole cube in the named variable. If the cube is an image
  set, its first plane and its spatial coordinates are also loaded in
  the RG buffer.

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{OLDLOAD}
\label{sec:GO:OLDLOAD:help}
\index{GO OLDLOAD command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax         [GO\]+blue{OLDLOAD} [cube] [+blue{/IN} varname status] [+blue{/SYNTAX} type]
                                                         [+blue{/ACCESS} Order]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                               +blue{Load a cube onto a sic variable}

  By default OLDLOAD loads the cube onto a read-only SIC variable
  called AAA1 using the new cube header. By default the loaded cube is
  set to be accessed by images, this can be changed by using option
  /ACCESS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset/speset) *                          +blue{Input cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /IN                                +blue{Define the name of the SIC variable}
  /SYNTAX               +blue{Define the type of structure of the SIC variable}
  /ACCESS                      +blue{Define the access type of the loaded cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{OLDLOAD /IN}
\label{sec:GO:OLDLOAD:IN:help}
\index{GO OLDLOAD /IN option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                              +blue{/IN} varname status
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /IN                                +blue{Define the name of the SIC variable}

  The option can also be used to modify the read-write status of the
  SIC variable
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VARNAME    +blue{Name of the variable onto which to load data}
  #2 (optional) STATUS                            +blue{Variable access status}
     Possible values: READ or WRITE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{OLDLOAD /SYNTAX}
\label{sec:GO:OLDLOAD:SYNTAX:help}
\index{GO OLDLOAD /SYNTAX option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/SYNTAX} type
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SYNTAX               +blue{Define the type of structure of the SIC variable}

  HEAD (default if options is not present) means the new CUBE header,
  HGDF means the classic GREG header
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) TYPE                          +blue{SIC structure syntax type}
     Possible values: HEAD or HGDF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{OLDLOAD /ACCESS}
\label{sec:GO:OLDLOAD:ACCESS:help}
\index{GO OLDLOAD /ACCESS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/ACCESS} Order
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ACCESS                      +blue{Define the access type of the loaded cube}

  If Access is IMAGE, command GO\GET will fetch images, if access is
  SPECTRUM, command GO\GET will fetch spectra
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ORDER                                        +blue{Order name}
     Possible values: IMAGE or SPECTRUM

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{SHOW}
\label{sec:GO:SHOW:help}
\index{GO SHOW command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax              [GO\]+blue{SHOW} [familyid] [+blue{/MOMENTS} [signal|noise|snr]]
                                               [+blue{/FIT} [signal|noise|snr]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract       +blue{Show combinations of cubes belonging to the same family}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset/speset) *              +blue{Family id to be showed}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MOMENTS                                             +blue{Show cube moments}
  /FIT                                            +blue{Show cube gaussian fit}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SHOW /MOMENTS}
\label{sec:GO:SHOW:MOMENTS:help}
\index{GO SHOW /MOMENTS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                     +blue{/MOMENTS} [signal|noise|snr]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MOMENTS                                             +blue{Show cube moments}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) KIND                              +blue{Signal or Noise or SNR}
     Possible values: signal, noise or snr

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SHOW /FIT}
\label{sec:GO:SHOW:FIT:help}
\index{GO SHOW /FIT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                         +blue{/FIT} [signal|noise|snr]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FIT                                            +blue{Show cube gaussian fit}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) KIND                              +blue{Signal or Noise or SNR}
     Possible values: signal, noise or snr

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{SPECTRUM}
\label{sec:GO:SPECTRUM:help}
\index{GO SPECTRUM command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                      [GO\]+blue{SPECTRUM} [cube] [+blue{/INTERACTIVE} ON|OFF]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                             +blue{Show a map of spectra from a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset/speset) *               +blue{Cube to be spectrumed}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INTERACTIVE                     +blue{Switch the interactive mode on or off}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SPECTRUM /INTERACTIVE}
\label{sec:GO:SPECTRUM:INTERACTIVE:help}
\index{GO SPECTRUM /INTERACTIVE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                             +blue{/INTERACTIVE} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INTERACTIVE                     +blue{Switch the interactive mode on or off}

  Default is ON.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{TOPOLOGY}
\label{sec:GO:TOPOLOGY:help}
\index{GO TOPOLOGY command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                 [GO\]+blue{TOPOLOGY} [cube] [+blue{/LIST}] [+blue{/TRUNCATE} ON|OFF]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                +blue{Compute the topology of the region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,subset) *  +blue{Cube for which topology is to be computed}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIST                  +blue{List the topology computed for the current cube}
  /TRUNCATE  +blue{Switch Truncate ranges at pixels/channels 1 and N on or off}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{TOPOLOGY /LIST}
\label{sec:GO:TOPOLOGY:LIST:help}
\index{GO TOPOLOGY /LIST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/LIST}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIST                  +blue{List the topology computed for the current cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{TOPOLOGY /TRUNCATE}
\label{sec:GO:TOPOLOGY:TRUNCATE:help}
\index{GO TOPOLOGY /TRUNCATE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                +blue{/TRUNCATE} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /TRUNCATE  +blue{Switch Truncate ranges at pixels/channels 1 and N on or off}

  Default is ON.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{VIEW}
\label{sec:GO:VIEW:help}
\index{GO VIEW command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax        [GO\]+blue{VIEW} [cube] [+blue{/CURRENT}] [+blue{/NEXT}] [+blue{/PREVIOUS}] [+blue{/FIRST}]
                                     [+blue{/LAST}] [+blue{/BEFOREFIRST}] [+blue{/AFTERLAST}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                    +blue{Interactive view of a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset/speset) *                   +blue{Cube to be viewed}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CURRENT                 +blue{View the current entry from the current index}
  /NEXT                       +blue{View the next entry from the current index}
  /PREVIOUS               +blue{View the previous entry from the current index}
  /FIRST                     +blue{View the first entry from the current index}
  /LAST                       +blue{View the last entry from the current index}
  /BEFOREFIRST        +blue{View the before first entry from the current index}
  /AFTERLAST             +blue{View the afterlast entry from the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{VIEW /CURRENT}
\label{sec:GO:VIEW:CURRENT:help}
\index{GO VIEW /CURRENT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/CURRENT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CURRENT                 +blue{View the current entry from the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{VIEW /NEXT}
\label{sec:GO:VIEW:NEXT:help}
\index{GO VIEW /NEXT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/NEXT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NEXT                       +blue{View the next entry from the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{VIEW /PREVIOUS}
\label{sec:GO:VIEW:PREVIOUS:help}
\index{GO VIEW /PREVIOUS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/PREVIOUS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PREVIOUS               +blue{View the previous entry from the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{VIEW /FIRST}
\label{sec:GO:VIEW:FIRST:help}
\index{GO VIEW /FIRST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/FIRST}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FIRST                     +blue{View the first entry from the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{VIEW /LAST}
\label{sec:GO:VIEW:LAST:help}
\index{GO VIEW /LAST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/LAST}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LAST                       +blue{View the last entry from the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{VIEW /BEFOREFIRST}
\label{sec:GO:VIEW:BEFOREFIRST:help}
\index{GO VIEW /BEFOREFIRST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/BEFOREFIRST}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BEFOREFIRST        +blue{View the before first entry from the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{VIEW /AFTERLAST}
\label{sec:GO:VIEW:AFTERLAST:help}
\index{GO VIEW /AFTERLAST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/AFTERLAST}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /AFTERLAST             +blue{View the afterlast entry from the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{HYPERVIEW}
\label{sec:GO:HYPERVIEW:help}
\index{GO HYPERVIEW command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax   [GO\]+blue{HYPERVIEW} [cube] [+blue{/CURRENT}] [+blue{/NEXT}] [+blue{/PREVIOUS}] [+blue{/FIRST}]
               [+blue{/LAST}] [+blue{/BEFOREFIRST}] [+blue{/AFTERLAST}] [+blue{/INTERACTIVE} ON|OFF]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                    +blue{Interactive view of a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset/speset) *                   +blue{Cube to be viewed}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CURRENT                 +blue{VIEW the current entry from the current index}
  /NEXT                       +blue{VIEW the next entry from the current index}
  /PREVIOUS               +blue{VIEW the previous entry from the current index}
  /FIRST                     +blue{VIEW the first entry from the current index}
  /LAST                       +blue{VIEW the last entry from the current index}
  /BEFOREFIRST        +blue{VIEW the before first entry from the current index}
  /AFTERLAST             +blue{VIEW the afterlast entry from the current index}
  /INTERACTIVE                     +blue{Switch the interactive mode on or off}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HYPERVIEW /CURRENT}
\label{sec:GO:HYPERVIEW:CURRENT:help}
\index{GO HYPERVIEW /CURRENT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/CURRENT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CURRENT                 +blue{VIEW the current entry from the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HYPERVIEW /NEXT}
\label{sec:GO:HYPERVIEW:NEXT:help}
\index{GO HYPERVIEW /NEXT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/NEXT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NEXT                       +blue{VIEW the next entry from the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HYPERVIEW /PREVIOUS}
\label{sec:GO:HYPERVIEW:PREVIOUS:help}
\index{GO HYPERVIEW /PREVIOUS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/PREVIOUS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PREVIOUS               +blue{VIEW the previous entry from the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HYPERVIEW /FIRST}
\label{sec:GO:HYPERVIEW:FIRST:help}
\index{GO HYPERVIEW /FIRST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/FIRST}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FIRST                     +blue{VIEW the first entry from the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HYPERVIEW /LAST}
\label{sec:GO:HYPERVIEW:LAST:help}
\index{GO HYPERVIEW /LAST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/LAST}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LAST                       +blue{VIEW the last entry from the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HYPERVIEW /BEFOREFIRST}
\label{sec:GO:HYPERVIEW:BEFOREFIRST:help}
\index{GO HYPERVIEW /BEFOREFIRST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/BEFOREFIRST}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BEFOREFIRST        +blue{VIEW the before first entry from the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HYPERVIEW /AFTERLAST}
\label{sec:GO:HYPERVIEW:AFTERLAST:help}
\index{GO HYPERVIEW /AFTERLAST option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/AFTERLAST}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /AFTERLAST             +blue{VIEW the afterlast entry from the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HYPERVIEW /INTERACTIVE}
\label{sec:GO:HYPERVIEW:INTERACTIVE:help}
\index{GO HYPERVIEW /INTERACTIVE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                             +blue{/INTERACTIVE} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INTERACTIVE                     +blue{Switch the interactive mode on or off}

  Default is ON.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\section{SET Language On-Line Help}
\label{sec:SET:help}
\index{SET command list}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  SET\                 +blue{Commands that set global behaviors of the program}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  AXSET                        +blue{Set how axes set are treated when reading}
  BLANKING               +blue{Set how blanked values are treated when reading}
  BUFFERING                  +blue{Set how input and output files are buffered}
  COLORS                     +blue{Set colors to be used in consistency prints}
  INDEX          +blue{Set which index should be used when searching for cubes}
  OUTPUT                                +blue{Set how output cubes are handled}
  PANEL                        +blue{Define and configure plot regions in GREG}
  SCALING                             +blue{Set the scaling region of interest}
  SPATIAL                             +blue{Set the spatial region of interest}
  SPECTRAL                           +blue{Set the spectral region of interest}
  TIMING      +blue{Enable or disable timing feedback at the end of processing}
  UNITS                                           +blue{Set user current units}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{AXSET}
\label{sec:SET:AXSET:help}
\index{SET AXSET command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                           [SET\]+blue{AXSET} [+blue{/IGNOREDEGENERAT} ON|OFF]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                     +blue{Set how axes set are treated when reading}

  The behaviour set by this command is the global behaviour for CUBE.
  If the user desires to keep degenerate axes by default this should be
  set to off. Degenerate axes can be deactivated on a per cube basis
  with the CUBE\MODIFY command
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /IGNOREDEGENERAT             +blue{Switch ignoring degenerate axes on or off}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{AXSET /IGNOREDEGENERAT}
\label{sec:SET:AXSET:IGNOREDEGENERAT:help}
\index{SET AXSET /IGNOREDEGENERAT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                         +blue{/IGNOREDEGENERAT} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /IGNOREDEGENERAT             +blue{Switch ignoring degenerate axes on or off}

  Default is ON.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{BLANKING}
\label{sec:SET:BLANKING:help}
\index{SET BLANKING command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                 [SET\]+blue{BLANKING} [ERROR|ONTHEFLY]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract               +blue{Set how blanked values are treated when reading}

  If mode is set to ERROR, an error will be raised if data contain Bval
  and Eval, else if mode is set to ONTHEFLY blanked values in the data
  will be automatically patched to NaN
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) BEHAVIOUR    +blue{behaviour when encountering blanking values}
     Possible values: ERROR or ONTHEFLY

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{BUFFERING}
\label{sec:SET:BUFFERING:help}
\index{SET BUFFERING command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                  [SET\]+blue{BUFFERING} [+blue{/INPUT} value] [+blue{/OUTPUT} value]
           [+blue{/BLOCK} size [unit]] [+blue{/LIMIT} size [unit]] [+blue{/TASK} size [unit]]
                                                             [+blue{/DEFAULTS}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                   +blue{Set how input and output files are buffered}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INPUT                                +blue{Define buffering for input files}
  /OUTPUT                              +blue{Define buffering for output files}
  /BLOCK                                      +blue{Block size for disk access}
  /LIMIT             +blue{Define the threshold for DISK use in automatic mode}
  /TASK                                        +blue{Define parallel task size}
  /DEFAULTS                                 +blue{Return buffering to defaults}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{BUFFERING /INPUT}
\label{sec:SET:BUFFERING:INPUT:help}
\index{SET BUFFERING /INPUT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/INPUT} value
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INPUT                                +blue{Define buffering for input files}

  Choose if the input files should be stored entirely in memory (MEMORY
  mode), or should be processed by blocks (DISK mode), or choose
  automatically between memory and disk processing depending on a limit
  (AUTOMATIC mode)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VALUE                                 +blue{Default is memory}
     Possible values: AUTO, NONE, MEMORY or DISK

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{BUFFERING /OUTPUT}
\label{sec:SET:BUFFERING:OUTPUT:help}
\index{SET BUFFERING /OUTPUT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/OUTPUT} value
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /OUTPUT                              +blue{Define buffering for output files}

  Choose if the output files should be stored entirely in memory
  (MEMORY mode), or should be processed by blocks (DISK mode), or
  choose automatically between memory and disk processing depending on
  a limit (AUTOMATIC mode)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VALUE                                 +blue{Default is memory}
     Possible values: AUTO, NONE, MEMORY or DISK

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{BUFFERING /BLOCK}
\label{sec:SET:BUFFERING:BLOCK:help}
\index{SET BUFFERING /BLOCK option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                              +blue{/BLOCK} size [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BLOCK                                      +blue{Block size for disk access}

  In MEMORY mode, files are read from disk to memory all at once in a
  single buffer, but this process is done by blocks of the given size.

  In DISK mode files are accessed by contiguous blocks of limited size.
  This allows processing of files larger than the available memory. In
  serial mode, keeping this parameter relatively small (e.g. 1% of the
  file size) saves memory with marginal file access overheads (e.g. 1%
  means 100 accesses to the file). In parallel mode, however, one might
  want to increase this value so that a large slice of the file is
  loaded in memory and is processed by several parallelisation tasks:
  the ideal value is Nthread times the /TASK size parameter
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SIZE                           +blue{Block size for disk mode}
  #2 (optional) UNIT                                 +blue{unit for block size}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{BUFFERING /LIMIT}
\label{sec:SET:BUFFERING:LIMIT:help}
\index{SET BUFFERING /LIMIT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                              +blue{/LIMIT} size [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIMIT             +blue{Define the threshold for DISK use in automatic mode}

  In AUTOMATIC mode, define the cube size threshold above which the
  file is processed by blocks on disk.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SIZE        +blue{Limit between Disk access and memory access}
  #2 (optional) UNIT                                      +blue{unit for limit}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{BUFFERING /TASK}
\label{sec:SET:BUFFERING:TASK:help}
\index{SET BUFFERING /TASK option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/TASK} size [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /TASK                                        +blue{Define parallel task size}

  When parallel processing is available, the entries (either images,
  spectra, or subcubes) are grouped in different tasks, and the tasks
  are executed in parallel.

  The larger the task, the smaller the task overheads. On the other
  hand, if tasks are too large, the currently processed data block
  (full file or file block) might not be divided in enough tasks to
  occupy all the parallel threads.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SIZE                     +blue{Size for parallelisation tasks}
  #2 (optional) UNIT                                  +blue{unit for task size}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{BUFFERING /DEFAULTS}
\label{sec:SET:BUFFERING:DEFAULTS:help}
\index{SET BUFFERING /DEFAULTS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/DEFAULTS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DEFAULTS                                 +blue{Return buffering to defaults}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{COLORS}
\label{sec:SET:COLORS:help}
\index{SET COLORS command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                [SET\]+blue{COLORS} [topic color] [+blue{/INCONSISTENT} color]
                     [+blue{/CONSISTENT} color] [+blue{/NOTCHECKED} color] [+blue{/DEFAULTS}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                   +blue{Set colors to be used in consistency prints}

  List the current consistency colors when called without arguments
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INCONSISTENT                        +blue{Set color for inconsistent fields}
  /CONSISTENT                            +blue{Set color for consistent fields}
  /NOTCHECKED                  +blue{Set color for fields that are not checked}
  /DEFAULTS                                         +blue{Reset color defaults}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COLORS /INCONSISTENT}
\label{sec:SET:COLORS:INCONSISTENT:help}
\index{SET COLORS /INCONSISTENT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                             +blue{/INCONSISTENT} color
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INCONSISTENT                        +blue{Set color for inconsistent fields}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) COLOR                                      +blue{Chosen color}
     Possible values: ORANGE, RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE, MAGENTA, CYAN,
     WHITE or BLACK

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COLORS /CONSISTENT}
\label{sec:SET:COLORS:CONSISTENT:help}
\index{SET COLORS /CONSISTENT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/CONSISTENT} color
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CONSISTENT                            +blue{Set color for consistent fields}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) COLOR                                      +blue{Chosen color}
     Possible values: ORANGE, RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE, MAGENTA, CYAN,
     WHITE or BLACK

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COLORS /NOTCHECKED}
\label{sec:SET:COLORS:NOTCHECKED:help}
\index{SET COLORS /NOTCHECKED option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/NOTCHECKED} color
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NOTCHECKED                  +blue{Set color for fields that are not checked}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) COLOR                                      +blue{Chosen color}
     Possible values: ORANGE, RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE, MAGENTA, CYAN,
     WHITE or BLACK

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COLORS /DEFAULTS}
\label{sec:SET:COLORS:DEFAULTS:help}
\index{SET COLORS /DEFAULTS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/DEFAULTS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DEFAULTS                                         +blue{Reset color defaults}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{INDEX}
\label{sec:SET:INDEX:help}
\index{SET INDEX command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                     [SET\]+blue{INDEX} [INPUT|CURRENT]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract       +blue{Set which index should be used when searching for cubes}

  No argument shows current value. Default is DAG
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) NAME                        +blue{Name of the index to be used}
     Possible values: DAG or CURRENT

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{OUTPUT}
\label{sec:SET:OUTPUT:help}
\index{SET OUTPUT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax      [SET\]+blue{OUTPUT} [+blue{/EXTREMA} ON|OFF] [+blue{/TODISK} ON|OFF] [+blue{/DEFAULT}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                              +blue{Set how output cubes are handled}

  /EXTREMA Enables or disables the automatic computation/update of the
  extrema section in the header of the output cubes. Default is ON.
  /TODISK Enables or disables writing the cubes from memory to disk at
  the end of the processing. This makes sense for memory mode only.
  Default is ON.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /EXTREMA                +blue{Switch automatic extrema calculation on or off}
  /TODISK                 +blue{Switch flushing to disk in disk mode on or off}
  /DEFAULT                                       +blue{Reset to default values}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{OUTPUT /EXTREMA}
\label{sec:SET:OUTPUT:EXTREMA:help}
\index{SET OUTPUT /EXTREMA option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                 +blue{/EXTREMA} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /EXTREMA                +blue{Switch automatic extrema calculation on or off}

  Default is ON.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{OUTPUT /TODISK}
\label{sec:SET:OUTPUT:TODISK:help}
\index{SET OUTPUT /TODISK option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/TODISK} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /TODISK                 +blue{Switch flushing to disk in disk mode on or off}

  Default is ON.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{OUTPUT /DEFAULT}
\label{sec:SET:OUTPUT:DEFAULT:help}
\index{SET OUTPUT /DEFAULT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/DEFAULT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DEFAULT                                       +blue{Reset to default values}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{PANEL}
\label{sec:SET:PANEL:help}
\index{SET PANEL command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax             [SET\]+blue{PANEL} [I [J]] [+blue{/NXY} nx [ny]] [+blue{/INTER} rx [ry]]
                                         [+blue{/SIZE} sx [sy]] [+blue{/ASPECT} ratio]
                  [+blue{/POSITION} preset | px1 px2 py1 py2] [+blue{/FIXED} [corner]]
                                                       [+blue{/DEFAULT}] [+blue{/BOX}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                     +blue{Define and configure plot regions in GREG}

  if only I is given panel counting starts at the top left and ends at
  the bottom right, if both I and J are given I stands for the column
  (from left to right) and J the line (from bottom to top). If no
  option is given PANEL uses the previous plot configurations, in the
  case of the first call of PANEL in the CUBE session, CUBE plot
  defaults are used
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) I                                  +blue{I-eth panel or Column}
  #2 (optional) J                                             +blue{J-eth line}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NXY                                         +blue{Define the grid of panels}
  /INTER                   +blue{Define the spacing between panels in the grid}
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the panel size relatively to one grid rectangle}
  /ASPECT                              +blue{Set the aspect ratio of the panel}
  /POSITION                     +blue{Set the area of the plot page to be used}
  /FIXED                   +blue{Fix panels to a corner of the total plot page}
  /DEFAULT                                          +blue{Reset PANEL defaults}
  /BOX                      +blue{Draw a box around the current panel position}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PANEL /NXY}
\label{sec:SET:PANEL:NXY:help}
\index{SET PANEL /NXY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/NXY} nx [ny]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NXY                                         +blue{Define the grid of panels}

  If only nx is given PANEL will use a square configuration to display
  nx plots. If both nx and ny are given nx stand for the number of
  columns of plots and ny for the number of lines of plots, with nx*ny
  being the total number of plots
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NX                +blue{Number of panels or number of columns}
  #2 (optional) NY                                       +blue{Number of lines}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PANEL /INTER}
\label{sec:SET:PANEL:INTER:help}
\index{SET PANEL /INTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/INTER} rx [ry]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INTER                   +blue{Define the spacing between panels in the grid}

  If rx and ry are given rx is the space in the x direction and ry is
  the spacing on the y direction.  If only rx is given rx is the
  spacing in both directions.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) RX              +blue{Spacing between panels along the x axis}
  #2 (optional) RY               +blue{Spacing between panels along the y axis}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PANEL /SIZE}
\label{sec:SET:PANEL:SIZE:help}
\index{SET PANEL /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/SIZE} sx [sy]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the panel size relatively to one grid rectangle}

  If sx and sy are given sx is the size in the x direction and sy is
  the size on the y direction.  If only sx is given sx is the size in
  both directions.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SX  +blue{Panel size along the x axis. The default value is 1}
  #2 (optional) SY   +blue{Panel size along the y axis. The default value is 1}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PANEL /ASPECT}
\label{sec:SET:PANEL:ASPECT:help}
\index{SET PANEL /ASPECT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/ASPECT} ratio
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ASPECT                              +blue{Set the aspect ratio of the panel}

  A ratio larger than 1 means that the X axis will be larger than the Y
  axis. If ratio is 0 or * the aspect ratio is chosen automatically to
  maximise plot area. Default is 0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) RATIO                                +blue{panel aspect ratio}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PANEL /POSITION}
\label{sec:SET:PANEL:POSITION:help}
\index{SET PANEL /POSITION option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                              +blue{/POSITION} preset | px1 px2 py1 py2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /POSITION                     +blue{Set the area of the plot page to be used}

  Unit is in fraction of the total GREG plot page smallest side, e.g.
  0.1 0.9 0.1 1.4. Using the same unit in both direction ensure that
  the same value correspond to the same length on the plot
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) PX1     +blue{Panel position preset or left side x coordinate}
     Possible values: px1, USER, DEFAULT, PLOT, HEADER or WEDGE
  #2 (optional) PX2                              +blue{right side x coordinate}
  #3 (optional) PY1                             +blue{bottom side y coordinate}
  #4 (optional) PY2                                +blue{top side y coordinate}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PANEL /FIXED}
\label{sec:SET:PANEL:FIXED:help}
\index{SET PANEL /FIXED option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                 +blue{/FIXED} [corner]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FIXED                   +blue{Fix panels to a corner of the total plot page}

  TRC for Top Right corner, TLC for the Top Left Corner, BRC for the
  Bottom Right Corner and BLC for the Bottom Left Corner
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) CORNER                            +blue{Corner to fix panel to}
     Possible values: NONE, TLC, TRC, BLC or BRC

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PANEL /DEFAULT}
\label{sec:SET:PANEL:DEFAULT:help}
\index{SET PANEL /DEFAULT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/DEFAULT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DEFAULT                                          +blue{Reset PANEL defaults}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PANEL /BOX}
\label{sec:SET:PANEL:BOX:help}
\index{SET PANEL /BOX option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                            +blue{/BOX}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BOX                      +blue{Draw a box around the current panel position}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{SCALING}
\label{sec:SET:SCALING:help}
\index{SET SCALING command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                [SET\]+blue{SCALING} [+blue{/RANGE} zmin zmax]
                            [+blue{/TRANSFER} function [parameter]] [+blue{/DEFAULTS}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                            +blue{Set the scaling region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE                                +blue{Set minimum and maximum on cubes}
  /TRANSFER                              +blue{Set transfer function for plots}
  /DEFAULTS                                       +blue{Reset SCALING defaults}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SCALING /RANGE}
\label{sec:SET:SCALING:RANGE:help}
\index{SET SCALING /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                +blue{/RANGE} zmin zmax
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE                                +blue{Set minimum and maximum on cubes}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ZMIN                                            +blue{Minimum}
  #2 (mandatory) ZMAX                                            +blue{Maximum}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SCALING /TRANSFER}
\label{sec:SET:SCALING:TRANSFER:help}
\index{SET SCALING /TRANSFER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                  +blue{/TRANSFER} function [parameter]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /TRANSFER                              +blue{Set transfer function for plots}

  Default transfer function is linear
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FUNCTION                   +blue{Transfer function to be used}
     Possible values: LINEAR, LOGARITHMIC or ASINH
  #2 (optional) PARAMETER +blue{Parameter for ASINH transfer function, default}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SCALING /DEFAULTS}
\label{sec:SET:SCALING:DEFAULTS:help}
\index{SET SCALING /DEFAULTS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/DEFAULTS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DEFAULTS                                       +blue{Reset SCALING defaults}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{SPATIAL}
\label{sec:SET:SPATIAL:help}
\index{SET SPATIAL command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                   [SET\]+blue{SPATIAL} [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]]
                 [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]] [+blue{/SAMPLING} sampl [sampm [unit]]]
                                                             [+blue{/DEFAULTS}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                            +blue{Set the spatial region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER               +blue{Set the center of the spatial region of interest}
  /SIZE                   +blue{Set the size of the spatial region of interest}
  /SAMPLING                             +blue{Set the sampling between spectra}
  /DEFAULTS                                       +blue{Reset SPATIAL defaults}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SPATIAL /CENTER}
\label{sec:SET:SPATIAL:CENTER:help}
\index{SET SPATIAL /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER               +blue{Set the center of the spatial region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SPATIAL /SIZE}
\label{sec:SET:SPATIAL:SIZE:help}
\index{SET SPATIAL /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE                   +blue{Set the size of the spatial region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SPATIAL /SAMPLING}
\label{sec:SET:SPATIAL:SAMPLING:help}
\index{SET SPATIAL /SAMPLING option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                  +blue{/SAMPLING} sampl [sampm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SAMPLING                             +blue{Set the sampling between spectra}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SAMPL                          +blue{Sampling in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SAMPM                           +blue{Sampling in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                +blue{Sampl and sampm unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SPATIAL /DEFAULTS}
\label{sec:SET:SPATIAL:DEFAULTS:help}
\index{SET SPATIAL /DEFAULTS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/DEFAULTS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DEFAULTS                                       +blue{Reset SPATIAL defaults}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{SPECTRAL}
\label{sec:SET:SPECTRAL:help}
\index{SET SPECTRAL command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                       [SET\]+blue{SPECTRAL} [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
                  [+blue{/FREQUENCY} line frequency [unit]] [+blue{/VSYS} velo [unit]]
                                                             [+blue{/DEFAULTS}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                           +blue{Set the spectral region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE       +blue{Set the velocity range of the spectral region of interest}
  /FREQUENCY +blue{Set the line, frequency and unit for the region of interest}
  /VSYS             +blue{Set the systemic velocity for the region of interest}
  /DEFAULTS                                      +blue{Reset SPECTRAL defaults}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SPECTRAL /RANGE}
\label{sec:SET:SPECTRAL:RANGE:help}
\index{SET SPECTRAL /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE       +blue{Set the velocity range of the spectral region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SPECTRAL /FREQUENCY}
\label{sec:SET:SPECTRAL:FREQUENCY:help}
\index{SET SPECTRAL /FREQUENCY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                +blue{/FREQUENCY} line frequency [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FREQUENCY +blue{Set the line, frequency and unit for the region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LINE                                          +blue{Line name}
  #2 (mandatory) FREQUENCY                                +blue{Line frequency}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                      +blue{Frequency unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     Hz

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SPECTRAL /VSYS}
\label{sec:SET:SPECTRAL:VSYS:help}
\index{SET SPECTRAL /VSYS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/VSYS} velo [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /VSYS             +blue{Set the systemic velocity for the region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VSYS                              +blue{New systemic velocity}
  #2 (optional) UNIT                                       +blue{Velocity unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SPECTRAL /DEFAULTS}
\label{sec:SET:SPECTRAL:DEFAULTS:help}
\index{SET SPECTRAL /DEFAULTS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/DEFAULTS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DEFAULTS                                      +blue{Reset SPECTRAL defaults}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{TIMING}
\label{sec:SET:TIMING:help}
\index{SET TIMING command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax        [SET\]+blue{TIMING} [+blue{/IO} ON|OFF] [+blue{/EXECUTION} ON|OFF] [+blue{/DEFAULT}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract    +blue{Enable or disable timing feedback at the end of processing}

  Default is OFF. Two topics are available: /EXECUTION for execution
  times, and /IO for data Input and Output, Default values can be reset
  with option /DEFAULT. TIMING without any options displays the current
  timing setup
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /IO                                         +blue{Switch IO timing on or off}
  /EXECUTION                           +blue{Switch execution timing on or off}
  /DEFAULT                                       +blue{Reset to default values}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{TIMING /IO}
\label{sec:SET:TIMING:IO:help}
\index{SET TIMING /IO option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/IO} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /IO                                         +blue{Switch IO timing on or off}

  Default is OFF.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{TIMING /EXECUTION}
\label{sec:SET:TIMING:EXECUTION:help}
\index{SET TIMING /EXECUTION option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/EXECUTION} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /EXECUTION                           +blue{Switch execution timing on or off}

  Default is OFF.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{TIMING /DEFAULT}
\label{sec:SET:TIMING:DEFAULT:help}
\index{SET TIMING /DEFAULT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/DEFAULT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DEFAULT                                       +blue{Reset to default values}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{UNITS}
\label{sec:SET:UNITS:help}
\index{SET UNITS command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax[SET\]+blue{UNITS} [+blue{/UV} name] [+blue{/FOV} name] [+blue{/POSANGLE} name] [+blue{/BEAM} name]
                   [+blue{/FREQUENCY} name] [+blue{/VELOCITY} name] [+blue{/WAVELENGTH} name]
          [+blue{/CHANNEL} name] [+blue{/PIXEL} name] [+blue{/DISTANCE} name] [+blue{/UNKNOWN} name]
                                                             [+blue{/DEFAULTS}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                        +blue{Set user current units}

  Current units are the units used to display information to the user
  and the expected units for user input. If called without options,
  UNITS display the current units and its convertion factor to internal
  units
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /UV                                      +blue{Set current unit for UV units}
  /FOV                                    +blue{Set current unit for FOV units}
  /POSANGLE                          +blue{Set current unit for POSANGLE units}
  /BEAM                                  +blue{Set current unit for BEAM units}
  /FREQUENCY                        +blue{Set current unit for FREQUENCY units}
  /VELOCITY                          +blue{Set current unit for VELOCITY units}
  /WAVELENGTH                      +blue{Set current unit for WAVELENGTH units}
  /CHANNEL                            +blue{Set current unit for CHANNEL units}
  /PIXEL                                +blue{Set current unit for PIXEL units}
  /DISTANCE                          +blue{Set current unit for DISTANCE units}
  /UNKNOWN                            +blue{Set current unit for UNKNOWN units}
  /DEFAULTS                            +blue{Restore current units to defaults}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UNITS /UV}
\label{sec:SET:UNITS:UV:help}
\index{SET UNITS /UV option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/UV} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /UV                                      +blue{Set current unit for UV units}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                              +blue{New current unit name}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     meter

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UNITS /FOV}
\label{sec:SET:UNITS:FOV:help}
\index{SET UNITS /FOV option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/FOV} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FOV                                    +blue{Set current unit for FOV units}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                              +blue{New current unit name}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UNITS /POSANGLE}
\label{sec:SET:UNITS:POSANGLE:help}
\index{SET UNITS /POSANGLE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/POSANGLE} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /POSANGLE                          +blue{Set current unit for POSANGLE units}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                              +blue{New current unit name}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian or degree

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UNITS /BEAM}
\label{sec:SET:UNITS:BEAM:help}
\index{SET UNITS /BEAM option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/BEAM} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BEAM                                  +blue{Set current unit for BEAM units}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                              +blue{New current unit name}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UNITS /FREQUENCY}
\label{sec:SET:UNITS:FREQUENCY:help}
\index{SET UNITS /FREQUENCY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                 +blue{/FREQUENCY} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FREQUENCY                        +blue{Set current unit for FREQUENCY units}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                              +blue{New current unit name}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     Hz

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UNITS /VELOCITY}
\label{sec:SET:UNITS:VELOCITY:help}
\index{SET UNITS /VELOCITY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/VELOCITY} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /VELOCITY                          +blue{Set current unit for VELOCITY units}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                              +blue{New current unit name}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UNITS /WAVELENGTH}
\label{sec:SET:UNITS:WAVELENGTH:help}
\index{SET UNITS /WAVELENGTH option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                +blue{/WAVELENGTH} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /WAVELENGTH                      +blue{Set current unit for WAVELENGTH units}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                              +blue{New current unit name}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     m or Ang

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UNITS /CHANNEL}
\label{sec:SET:UNITS:CHANNEL:help}
\index{SET UNITS /CHANNEL option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/CHANNEL} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CHANNEL                            +blue{Set current unit for CHANNEL units}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                              +blue{New current unit name}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     channel

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UNITS /PIXEL}
\label{sec:SET:UNITS:PIXEL:help}
\index{SET UNITS /PIXEL option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                     +blue{/PIXEL} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PIXEL                                +blue{Set current unit for PIXEL units}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                              +blue{New current unit name}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     pixel

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UNITS /DISTANCE}
\label{sec:SET:UNITS:DISTANCE:help}
\index{SET UNITS /DISTANCE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/DISTANCE} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DISTANCE                          +blue{Set current unit for DISTANCE units}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                              +blue{New current unit name}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     pc

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UNITS /UNKNOWN}
\label{sec:SET:UNITS:UNKNOWN:help}
\index{SET UNITS /UNKNOWN option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/UNKNOWN} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /UNKNOWN                            +blue{Set current unit for UNKNOWN units}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME                              +blue{New current unit name}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     Unknown

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{UNITS /DEFAULTS}
\label{sec:SET:UNITS:DEFAULTS:help}
\index{SET UNITS /DEFAULTS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/DEFAULTS}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DEFAULTS                            +blue{Restore current units to defaults}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\section{COMPUTE Language On-Line Help}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:help}
\index{COMPUTE command list}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  COMPUTE\                       +blue{Basic mathematical operations on a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  SUM                                       +blue{Compute the SUM of two cubes}
  DIFFERENCE                         +blue{Compute the DIFFERENCE of two cubes}
  PRODUCT                               +blue{Compute the PRODUCT of two cubes}
  RATIO                                   +blue{Compute the RATIO of two cubes}
  AVERAGE                               +blue{Compute the AVERAGE of two cubes}
  CONVOLUTION   +blue{Convolve the spectral axis of one cube with one spectrum}
  FFT                           +blue{Fourier transform a real or complex cube}
  AMPLITUDE                              +blue{Compute the AMPLITUDE of a cube}
  PHASE                                      +blue{Compute the PHASE of a cube}
  COMPLEX                               +blue{Compute the COMPLEX of two cubes}
  CONJUGATE                              +blue{Compute the CONJUGATE of a cube}
  CUMULANT      +blue{Cumulate the values of input cube along the X and Y axes}
  DERIVATIVE                            +blue{Compute the DERIVATIVE of a cube}
  WEIGHT                                    +blue{Compute the WEIGHT of a cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{SUM}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:SUM:help}
\index{COMPUTE SUM command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax          [COMPUTE\]+blue{SUM} summand1 summand2 [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                  +blue{Compute the SUM of two cubes}

  Input and output cubes must be complex
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                             +blue{summand1 cube}
  #2 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                             +blue{summand2 cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) sum                          +blue{Output cube of the operation}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SUM /SIZE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:SUM:SIZE:help}
\index{COMPUTE SUM /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SUM /CENTER}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:SUM:CENTER:help}
\index{COMPUTE SUM /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SUM /RANGE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:SUM:RANGE:help}
\index{COMPUTE SUM /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{DIFFERENCE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:DIFFERENCE:help}
\index{COMPUTE DIFFERENCE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax  [COMPUTE\]+blue{DIFFERENCE} subtrahend minuend [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                           +blue{Compute the DIFFERENCE of two cubes}

  Input and output cubes must be complex
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                           +blue{subtrahend cube}
  #2 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                              +blue{minuend cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) difference                   +blue{Output cube of the operation}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DIFFERENCE /SIZE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:DIFFERENCE:SIZE:help}
\index{COMPUTE DIFFERENCE /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DIFFERENCE /CENTER}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:DIFFERENCE:CENTER:help}
\index{COMPUTE DIFFERENCE /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DIFFERENCE /RANGE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:DIFFERENCE:RANGE:help}
\index{COMPUTE DIFFERENCE /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{PRODUCT}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:PRODUCT:help}
\index{COMPUTE PRODUCT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax        [COMPUTE\]+blue{PRODUCT} factor1 factor2 [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                              +blue{Compute the PRODUCT of two cubes}

  Input and output cubes must be complex
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                              +blue{factor1 cube}
  #2 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                              +blue{factor2 cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) product                      +blue{Output cube of the operation}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PRODUCT /SIZE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:PRODUCT:SIZE:help}
\index{COMPUTE PRODUCT /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PRODUCT /CENTER}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:PRODUCT:CENTER:help}
\index{COMPUTE PRODUCT /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PRODUCT /RANGE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:PRODUCT:RANGE:help}
\index{COMPUTE PRODUCT /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{RATIO}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:RATIO:help}
\index{COMPUTE RATIO command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax    [COMPUTE\]+blue{RATIO} numerator denominator [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                +blue{Compute the RATIO of two cubes}

  Input and output cubes must be complex
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                            +blue{numerator cube}
  #2 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                          +blue{denominator cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) ratio                        +blue{Output cube of the operation}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{RATIO /SIZE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:RATIO:SIZE:help}
\index{COMPUTE RATIO /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{RATIO /CENTER}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:RATIO:CENTER:help}
\index{COMPUTE RATIO /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{RATIO /RANGE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:RATIO:RANGE:help}
\index{COMPUTE RATIO /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{AVERAGE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:AVERAGE:help}
\index{COMPUTE AVERAGE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax      [COMPUTE\]+blue{AVERAGE} operand1 operand2 [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                              +blue{Compute the AVERAGE of two cubes}

  Input and output cubes must be complex
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                             +blue{operand1 cube}
  #2 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                             +blue{operand2 cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) averaged                     +blue{Output cube of the operation}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{AVERAGE /SIZE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:AVERAGE:SIZE:help}
\index{COMPUTE AVERAGE /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{AVERAGE /CENTER}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:AVERAGE:CENTER:help}
\index{COMPUTE AVERAGE /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{AVERAGE /RANGE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:AVERAGE:RANGE:help}
\index{COMPUTE AVERAGE /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{CONVOLUTION}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:CONVOLUTION:help}
\index{COMPUTE CONVOLUTION command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                   [COMPUTE\]+blue{CONVOLUTION} [cubeid1] [spectrumid2]
                  [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]] [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]]
                                              [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract      +blue{Convolve the spectral axis of one cube with one spectrum}

  Input and output cubes are real
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *                                       +blue{Cube}
  #2 (optional,read,speset) *spectrum*                          +blue{Spectrum}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) convolution                                +blue{Convolved cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CONVOLUTION /SIZE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:CONVOLUTION:SIZE:help}
\index{COMPUTE CONVOLUTION /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CONVOLUTION /CENTER}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:CONVOLUTION:CENTER:help}
\index{COMPUTE CONVOLUTION /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CONVOLUTION /RANGE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:CONVOLUTION:RANGE:help}
\index{COMPUTE CONVOLUTION /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{FFT}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:FFT:help}
\index{COMPUTE FFT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                     [COMPUTE\]+blue{FFT} [cubeid] [+blue{/DIRECT}] [+blue{/INVERSE}]
                  [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]] [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]]
                                              [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                      +blue{Fourier transform a real or complex cube}

  The output will be either real or complex.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *                                 +blue{Input data}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DIRECT           +blue{Compute the direct FFT (Default for real input cube)}
  /INVERSE      +blue{Compute the inverse FFT (Default for complex input cube)}
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) *,fft                                            +blue{FFT cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FFT /DIRECT}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:FFT:DIRECT:help}
\index{COMPUTE FFT /DIRECT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                         +blue{/DIRECT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DIRECT           +blue{Compute the direct FFT (Default for real input cube)}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FFT /INVERSE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:FFT:INVERSE:help}
\index{COMPUTE FFT /INVERSE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/INVERSE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INVERSE      +blue{Compute the inverse FFT (Default for complex input cube)}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FFT /SIZE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:FFT:SIZE:help}
\index{COMPUTE FFT /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FFT /CENTER}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:FFT:CENTER:help}
\index{COMPUTE FFT /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FFT /RANGE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:FFT:RANGE:help}
\index{COMPUTE FFT /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{AMPLITUDE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:AMPLITUDE:help}
\index{COMPUTE AMPLITUDE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                [COMPUTE\]+blue{AMPLITUDE} input [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                               +blue{Compute the AMPLITUDE of a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *                                 +blue{input cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) amplitude                    +blue{Output cube of the operation}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{AMPLITUDE /SIZE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:AMPLITUDE:SIZE:help}
\index{COMPUTE AMPLITUDE /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{AMPLITUDE /CENTER}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:AMPLITUDE:CENTER:help}
\index{COMPUTE AMPLITUDE /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{AMPLITUDE /RANGE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:AMPLITUDE:RANGE:help}
\index{COMPUTE AMPLITUDE /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{PHASE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:PHASE:help}
\index{COMPUTE PHASE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                    [COMPUTE\]+blue{PHASE} input [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                   +blue{Compute the PHASE of a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *                                 +blue{input cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) phase                        +blue{Output cube of the operation}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PHASE /SIZE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:PHASE:SIZE:help}
\index{COMPUTE PHASE /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PHASE /CENTER}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:PHASE:CENTER:help}
\index{COMPUTE PHASE /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PHASE /RANGE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:PHASE:RANGE:help}
\index{COMPUTE PHASE /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{COMPLEX}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:COMPLEX:help}
\index{COMPUTE COMPLEX command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax         [COMPUTE\]+blue{COMPLEX} real imaginary [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                              +blue{Compute the COMPLEX of two cubes}

  Input and output cubes must be complex
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                                 +blue{real cube}
  #2 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                            +blue{imaginary cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) complex                      +blue{Output cube of the operation}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COMPLEX /SIZE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:COMPLEX:SIZE:help}
\index{COMPUTE COMPLEX /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COMPLEX /CENTER}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:COMPLEX:CENTER:help}
\index{COMPUTE COMPLEX /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COMPLEX /RANGE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:COMPLEX:RANGE:help}
\index{COMPUTE COMPLEX /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{CONJUGATE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:CONJUGATE:help}
\index{COMPUTE CONJUGATE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                [COMPUTE\]+blue{CONJUGATE} input [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                               +blue{Compute the CONJUGATE of a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *                                 +blue{input cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) conjugate                    +blue{Output cube of the operation}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CONJUGATE /SIZE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:CONJUGATE:SIZE:help}
\index{COMPUTE CONJUGATE /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CONJUGATE /CENTER}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:CONJUGATE:CENTER:help}
\index{COMPUTE CONJUGATE /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CONJUGATE /RANGE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:CONJUGATE:RANGE:help}
\index{COMPUTE CONJUGATE /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{CUMULANT}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:CUMULANT:help}
\index{COMPUTE CUMULANT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                [COMPUTE\]+blue{CUMULANT} [cubeid] [+blue{/DIRECT}] [+blue{/INVERSE}]
                  [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]] [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]]
                                              [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract      +blue{Cumulate the values of input cube along the X and Y axes}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *                                +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DIRECT                              +blue{Cumulate from bottom left  corner}
  /INVERSE                             +blue{Cumulate from    top right corner}
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) *,cumulant                                  +blue{CUMULANT cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CUMULANT /DIRECT}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:CUMULANT:DIRECT:help}
\index{COMPUTE CUMULANT /DIRECT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                         +blue{/DIRECT}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DIRECT                              +blue{Cumulate from bottom left  corner}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CUMULANT /INVERSE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:CUMULANT:INVERSE:help}
\index{COMPUTE CUMULANT /INVERSE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/INVERSE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INVERSE                             +blue{Cumulate from    top right corner}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CUMULANT /SIZE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:CUMULANT:SIZE:help}
\index{COMPUTE CUMULANT /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CUMULANT /CENTER}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:CUMULANT:CENTER:help}
\index{COMPUTE CUMULANT /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CUMULANT /RANGE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:CUMULANT:RANGE:help}
\index{COMPUTE CUMULANT /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{DERIVATIVE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:DERIVATIVE:help}
\index{COMPUTE DERIVATIVE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax               [COMPUTE\]+blue{DERIVATIVE} input [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                              +blue{Compute the DERIVATIVE of a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *                                 +blue{input cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) derivative                   +blue{Output cube of the operation}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DERIVATIVE /SIZE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:DERIVATIVE:SIZE:help}
\index{COMPUTE DERIVATIVE /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DERIVATIVE /CENTER}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:DERIVATIVE:CENTER:help}
\index{COMPUTE DERIVATIVE /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DERIVATIVE /RANGE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:DERIVATIVE:RANGE:help}
\index{COMPUTE DERIVATIVE /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{WEIGHT}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:WEIGHT:help}
\index{COMPUTE WEIGHT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                   [COMPUTE\]+blue{WEIGHT} noise [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                  +blue{Compute the WEIGHT of a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *                                 +blue{noise cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) weight                       +blue{Output cube of the operation}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{WEIGHT /SIZE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:WEIGHT:SIZE:help}
\index{COMPUTE WEIGHT /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{WEIGHT /CENTER}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:WEIGHT:CENTER:help}
\index{COMPUTE WEIGHT /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{WEIGHT /RANGE}
\label{sec:COMPUTE:WEIGHT:RANGE:help}
\index{COMPUTE WEIGHT /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\section{CUBE Language On-Line Help}
\label{sec:CUBE:help}
\index{CUBE command list}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  CUBE\             +blue{Commands that performs various computations on cubes}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  APERTURE                         +blue{Stack spectra within a given aperture}
  BASELINE                               +blue{Subtract a baseline from a cube}
  CIRCLE                    +blue{Average intensities of a cube along ellipses}
  COMPARE                        +blue{Check whether input cubes are identical}
  COMPRESS +blue{Compress an image or cube by a factor 2 in spatial directions}
  CONSISTENCY             +blue{Check the consistency between two cube headers}
  CONVERT                              +blue{Convert the unit of the cube data}
  DETECT    +blue{Split the data into detected signal voxels and residual ones}
  EXTRACT                                              +blue{Extract a subcube}
  EXTREMA                                  +blue{Compute the extrema of a cube}
  FEATHER             +blue{Combine two cubes of different spatial resolutions}
  FILL                                                    +blue{Fill a subcube}
  HEADER                                            +blue{List the cube header}
  LUMINOSITY                      +blue{Compute the total luminosity of a cube}
  MODIFY                                   +blue{Modify CUBE header coherently}
  MOMENTS            +blue{Compute various moments for each spectrum of a cube}
  NOISE                 +blue{Compute the noise RMS of each spectrum of a cube}
  POLAR                      +blue{Reproject data on polar spatial coordinates}
  REPLACE                     +blue{Replace a value by another one in the data}
  REPROJECT                         +blue{Reproject the spatial grid of a cube}
  RESAMPLE                                    +blue{Spectrally resample a cube}
  ROTATE                                   +blue{Rotate a cube around a center}
  SEGMENT +blue{Segment a SNR cube into contiguous regions of decreasing value}
  SHUFFLE                            +blue{Shuffle the spectral axis of a cube}
  SLICE                 +blue{Extract a 2D Position-Velocity slice from a cube}
  SMOOTH                                         +blue{Spatially smooth a cube}
  SNR                                  +blue{Compute the signal to noise ratio}
  SORT                   +blue{Sort the intensities of each spectrum of a cube}
  STACK                                          +blue{Stack spectra or images}
  STITCH                             +blue{Stitch cubes from the current index}
  WINDOW              +blue{Find the signal windows of each spectrum of a cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{APERTURE}
\label{sec:CUBE:APERTURE:help}
\index{CUBE APERTURE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        [CUBE\]+blue{APERTURE} [cubeid]
                        [+blue{/DIAMETER} major [minor [unit [pang [paunit]]]]]
                        [+blue{/POSITION} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/SUM}] [+blue{/MEAN}]
                              [+blue{/BACKGROUND} value] [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                         +blue{Stack spectra within a given aperture}

  By default the aperture has the size and shape of the beam and is
  centered at the projection center. This can be changed by using
  options /POSITION and /ELLIPSE. The aperture can be compute either as
  a mean (/MEAN) or a sum (/SUM). When not specified, the program will
  choose the operation based on the input cube unit. If it is in K
  (Tmb), the aperture will be a mean in K (Tmb) and if it is in Jy/beam
  the aperture will be a sum in Jy.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DIAMETER +blue{Define the aperture ellipse axis diameters and position angl}
  /POSITION                                 +blue{Define the aperture position}
  /SUM                                            +blue{A sum will be computed}
  /MEAN                                          +blue{A mean will be computed}
  /BACKGROUND +blue{Define the multiplicative factor for the background diamet}
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (imaset) aperture,spectrum                    +blue{The aperture spectrum}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{APERTURE /DIAMETER}
\label{sec:CUBE:APERTURE:DIAMETER:help}
\index{CUBE APERTURE /DIAMETER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                  +blue{/DIAMETER} major [minor [unit [pang [paunit]]]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DIAMETER +blue{Define the aperture ellipse axis diameters and position angl}

  If major or minor are set to *, the current beamsize is assumed. If
  minor axis is omited it is assumed to be equal to the major axis,
  i.e. a circle. If pang is omited an angle of 0 degrees from north is
  assumed.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) MAJOR                               +blue{Major axis diameter}
  #2 (optional) MINOR                                +blue{Minor axis diameter}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                       +blue{diameter unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec
  #4 (optional) PANG                                      +blue{Position angle}
  #5 (optional) PAUNIT                               +blue{Position angle unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian or degree

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{APERTURE /POSITION}
\label{sec:CUBE:APERTURE:POSITION:help}
\index{CUBE APERTURE /POSITION option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                 +blue{/POSITION} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /POSITION                                 +blue{Define the aperture position}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{APERTURE /SUM}
\label{sec:CUBE:APERTURE:SUM:help}
\index{CUBE APERTURE /SUM option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                            +blue{/SUM}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SUM                                            +blue{A sum will be computed}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{APERTURE /MEAN}
\label{sec:CUBE:APERTURE:MEAN:help}
\index{CUBE APERTURE /MEAN option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/MEAN}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MEAN                                          +blue{A mean will be computed}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{APERTURE /BACKGROUND}
\label{sec:CUBE:APERTURE:BACKGROUND:help}
\index{CUBE APERTURE /BACKGROUND option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/BACKGROUND} value
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BACKGROUND +blue{Define the multiplicative factor for the background diamet}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VALUE                                  +blue{BACKGROUND value}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{APERTURE /SIZE}
\label{sec:CUBE:APERTURE:SIZE:help}
\index{CUBE APERTURE /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{APERTURE /CENTER}
\label{sec:CUBE:APERTURE:CENTER:help}
\index{CUBE APERTURE /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{APERTURE /RANGE}
\label{sec:CUBE:APERTURE:RANGE:help}
\index{CUBE APERTURE /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{BASELINE}
\label{sec:CUBE:BASELINE:help}
\index{CUBE BASELINE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax           [CUBE\]+blue{BASELINE} [cubeid] [+blue{/MEDIAN} [width [sampling]]]
                 [+blue{/POLYNOMIAL} deg1 [tr12 deg2 [... [trij degj [unit]]]]]
                     [+blue{/WAVELET} order] [+blue{/LINE} l1 h1 [... [ln hn]] [unit]]
                                                        [+blue{/MASK} [maskid]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                               +blue{Subtract a baseline from a cube}

  Three algorithms are available to compute a baseline: /MEDIAN,
  /WAVELET and /POLYNOMIAL. Only one of these three can be given at a
  time. If no algorithm option is given BASELINE defaults to /MEDIAN.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *cube*                            +blue{Input cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MEDIAN             +blue{Use a median running filter to define the baseline}
  /POLYNOMIAL           +blue{Fit Chebyshev polynomials to define the baseline}
  /WAVELET                   +blue{Use a wavelet filter to define the baseline}
  /LINE       +blue{Define global line regions to be ignored during baselining}
  /MASK +blue{Use a mask to define line regions to be ignored during baselinin}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) baselined,base                              +blue{Baseline cube}
  #2 (sameset) baselined,line,cube              +blue{Baseline subtracted cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{BASELINE /MEDIAN}
\label{sec:CUBE:BASELINE:MEDIAN:help}
\index{CUBE BASELINE /MEDIAN option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                      +blue{/MEDIAN} [width [sampling]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MEDIAN             +blue{Use a median running filter to define the baseline}

  The median and associated median absolute deviation are computed in
  windows of the given width, sampled every sampling space.
  Intermediate values are then linearly interpolated so that the final
  cubes have the same number of channels as the input cube. Flat values
  are used (no extrapolation) For the first and last half windows
  (boundary conditions). When the input channels are blanked, the
  resulting channels are also blanked. Blank channels do not contribute
  to the surrounding windows.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) WIDTH                               +blue{Running filter width}
  #2 (optional) SAMPLING                         +blue{Running filter sampling}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{BASELINE /POLYNOMIAL}
\label{sec:CUBE:BASELINE:POLYNOMIAL:help}
\index{CUBE BASELINE /POLYNOMIAL option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax           +blue{/POLYNOMIAL} deg1 [tr12 deg2 [... [trij degj [unit]]]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /POLYNOMIAL           +blue{Fit Chebyshev polynomials to define the baseline}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) DEG1                    +blue{Degree for the first polynomial}
  #2 (unlimited) TR12     +blue{Transition between first and second polynomial}
  #3 (unlimited) DEG2                   +blue{Degree for the second polynomial}
  #4 (unlimited) TRIJ          +blue{Transition between ith and jth polynomial}
  #5 (unlimited) DEGJ                      +blue{Degree for the jth polynomial}
  #6 (optional) UNIT +blue{Unit of the transitions between two chebyshev polyn}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{BASELINE /WAVELET}
\label{sec:CUBE:BASELINE:WAVELET:help}
\index{CUBE BASELINE /WAVELET option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/WAVELET} order
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /WAVELET                   +blue{Use a wavelet filter to define the baseline}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ORDER                                     +blue{Wavelet order}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{BASELINE /LINE}
\label{sec:CUBE:BASELINE:LINE:help}
\index{CUBE BASELINE /LINE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                +blue{/LINE} l1 h1 [... [ln hn]] [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LINE       +blue{Define global line regions to be ignored during baselining}

  Enable to define one or more spectral ranges
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) L1                              +blue{Low edge of first range}
  #2 (mandatory) H1                             +blue{High edge of first range}
  #3 (unlimited) LN                               +blue{Low edge of n-th range}
  #4 (unlimited) HN                              +blue{High edge of n-th range}
  #5 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{BASELINE /MASK}
\label{sec:CUBE:BASELINE:MASK:help}
\index{CUBE BASELINE /MASK option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/MASK} [maskid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MASK +blue{Use a mask to define line regions to be ignored during baselinin}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *mask*             +blue{Mask cube can be 2D or 3D}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{CIRCLE}
\label{sec:CUBE:CIRCLE:help}
\index{CUBE CIRCLE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax            [CUBE\]+blue{CIRCLE} [cube] [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]]
                         [+blue{/ELLIPSE} major [minor [unit [pang [paunit]]]]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                  +blue{Average intensities of a cube along ellipses}

  By default the averaging is circular and centered at the projection
  center. This can be changed by using options /CENTER and /ELLIPSE.
  The axes given to option /ELLIPSE will be used to derive the aspect
  ratio over which to compute the azimuthal average.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER                                          +blue{Center of the ellipse}
  /ELLIPSE                        +blue{Define ellipse axes and position angle}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (fullset) circle,npix                      +blue{Cube of number of pixels}
  #2 (fullset) circle,sum                                   +blue{Cube of sums}
  #3 (fullset) circle,averaged                          +blue{Cube of averages}
  #4 (fullset) circle,noise                               +blue{Cube of noises}
  #5 (fullset) circle,minimum                             +blue{Cube of minima}
  #6 (fullset) circle,maximum                             +blue{Cube of maxima}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CIRCLE /CENTER}
\label{sec:CUBE:CIRCLE:CENTER:help}
\index{CUBE CIRCLE /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER                                          +blue{Center of the ellipse}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CIRCLE /ELLIPSE}
\label{sec:CUBE:CIRCLE:ELLIPSE:help}
\index{CUBE CIRCLE /ELLIPSE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                   +blue{/ELLIPSE} major [minor [unit [pang [paunit]]]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ELLIPSE                        +blue{Define ellipse axes and position angle}

  If major or minor axis are *, the current beamsize is assumed.If
  minor axis is omited it is assumed to be equal to the major axis,
  i.e. a circle. If pang is omited an angle of 0 degrees from north is
  assumed.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) MAJOR                                        +blue{Major axis}
  #2 (optional) MINOR                                         +blue{Minor axis}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Axes unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec
  #4 (optional) PANG                                      +blue{Position angle}
  #5 (optional) PAUNIT                                         +blue{pang unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian or degree

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{COMPARE}
\label{sec:CUBE:COMPARE:help}
\index{CUBE COMPARE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax              [CUBE\]+blue{COMPARE} cube1 cube2 [+blue{/SIGNIFICANCE} epsilon]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                       +blue{Check whether input cubes are identical}

  Compute the residuals (= cube1-cube2), the relative error
  (=2*(cube1-cube2)/(cube1+cube2)/), and a mask with the locations
  where the data are equal/different as 0 and 1, respectively. The
  equality is computed by comparing the relative error with epsilon. By
  default epsilon = 1e-6.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,read,subset) *                             +blue{Input cube #1}
  #2 (mandatory,read,subset) *cube*                        +blue{Input cube #2}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIGNIFICANCE             +blue{Define the relative error significance level}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) compared,residuals                      +blue{Cube of residuals}
  #2 (sameset) compared,relative,error               +blue{Relative error cube}
  #3 (sameset) compared,mask +blue{Locations where the data are equal/differen}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COMPARE /SIGNIFICANCE}
\label{sec:CUBE:COMPARE:SIGNIFICANCE:help}
\index{CUBE COMPARE /SIGNIFICANCE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                           +blue{/SIGNIFICANCE} epsilon
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIGNIFICANCE             +blue{Define the relative error significance level}

  Default to 1e-6
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) EPSILON               +blue{Relative error significance level}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{COMPRESS}
\label{sec:CUBE:COMPRESS:help}
\index{CUBE COMPRESS command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax             [CUBE\]+blue{COMPRESS} [cubeid] [+blue{/SPATIAL} N] [+blue{/SPECTRAL} N]
                  [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]] [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]]
                                              [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract +blue{Compress an image or cube by a factor 2 in spatial directions}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,subset) *                                +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SPATIAL           +blue{Customize the compression factor along spatial axes}
  /SPECTRAL         +blue{Customize the compression factor along spectral axis}
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) *,compressed                                  +blue{Output cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COMPRESS /SPATIAL}
\label{sec:CUBE:COMPRESS:SPATIAL:help}
\index{CUBE COMPRESS /SPATIAL option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/SPATIAL} N
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SPATIAL           +blue{Customize the compression factor along spatial axes}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) N                                     +blue{Compression factor}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COMPRESS /SPECTRAL}
\label{sec:CUBE:COMPRESS:SPECTRAL:help}
\index{CUBE COMPRESS /SPECTRAL option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                     +blue{/SPECTRAL} N
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SPECTRAL         +blue{Customize the compression factor along spectral axis}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) N                                     +blue{Compression factor}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COMPRESS /SIZE}
\label{sec:CUBE:COMPRESS:SIZE:help}
\index{CUBE COMPRESS /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COMPRESS /CENTER}
\label{sec:CUBE:COMPRESS:CENTER:help}
\index{CUBE COMPRESS /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{COMPRESS /RANGE}
\label{sec:CUBE:COMPRESS:RANGE:help}
\index{CUBE COMPRESS /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{CONSISTENCY}
\label{sec:CUBE:CONSISTENCY:help}
\index{CUBE CONSISTENCY command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax             [CUBE\]+blue{CONSISTENCY} [cube1 cube2] [+blue{/NOCHECK} section]
           [+blue{/TOLERANCE} [SPECTRAL Tol] [SPATIAL Tol] [BEAM Tol]] [+blue{/INDEX}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                +blue{Check the consistency between two cube headers}

  The consistency is divided into 4 sections. The SPATIAL, and SPECTRAL
  sections describe the spatial and spectral characterstics of the
  cube, respectively. The ARRAY and OBSERVATORY sections describe the
  characteristics of the data array and used telescope, respectively.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,header,imaset/speset) *                        +blue{First cube}
  #2 (optional,header,imaset/speset) *                       +blue{Second cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NOCHECK                +blue{Set which consistency check(s) will be ignored}
  /TOLERANCE           +blue{Customize the tolerance on parameters consistency}
  /INDEX            +blue{Check consistency between cubes in the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CONSISTENCY /NOCHECK}
\label{sec:CUBE:CONSISTENCY:NOCHECK:help}
\index{CUBE CONSISTENCY /NOCHECK option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                +blue{/NOCHECK} section
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NOCHECK                +blue{Set which consistency check(s) will be ignored}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (unlimited) SECTION   +blue{Section(s) to be ignored in consistency check}
     Possible values: SPATIAL, SPECTRAL, ARRAY or OBSERVATORY

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CONSISTENCY /TOLERANCE}
\label{sec:CUBE:CONSISTENCY:TOLERANCE:help}
\index{CUBE CONSISTENCY /TOLERANCE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax              +blue{/TOLERANCE} [SPECTRAL Tol] [SPATIAL Tol] [BEAM Tol]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /TOLERANCE           +blue{Customize the tolerance on parameters consistency}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (unlimited) SECTION  +blue{Section(s) that will have a modified tolerance}
     Possible values: SPATIAL, SPECTRAL or BEAM
  #2 (unlimited) TOL       +blue{New tolerance for a given section, in percent}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CONSISTENCY /INDEX}
\label{sec:CUBE:CONSISTENCY:INDEX:help}
\index{CUBE CONSISTENCY /INDEX option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/INDEX}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /INDEX            +blue{Check consistency between cubes in the current index}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{CONVERT}
\label{sec:CUBE:CONVERT:help}
\index{CUBE CONVERT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax              [CUBE\]+blue{CONVERT} [cube] [+blue{/UNIT} name] [+blue{/FACTOR} value]
                                             [+blue{/EFFICIENCIES} Beff [Feff]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                             +blue{Convert the unit of the cube data}

  The conversion factor can be automatically guessed between known
  units ofthe same kind, eg, K (Tmb) to Jy/beam, or km/s to m/s. Else,
  the /FACTORkey allows you to explicitly define a multiplicative
  conversion factorbetween input and output units. The /EFFICIENCIES
  key allows you tospecify the beam and forward efficiencies required
  to convert from and to K (Ta*).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,subset) *cube*                            +blue{Input cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /UNIT                                   +blue{Select the desired output unit}
  /FACTOR                     +blue{Explicitly define a unit conversion factor}
  /EFFICIENCIES                              +blue{Convert to and From K (Ta*)}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) converted,cube                             +blue{Converted cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CONVERT /UNIT}
\label{sec:CUBE:CONVERT:UNIT:help}
\index{CUBE CONVERT /UNIT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/UNIT} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /UNIT                                   +blue{Select the desired output unit}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NAME +blue{A unit name either known or unknown by the program}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CONVERT /FACTOR}
\label{sec:CUBE:CONVERT:FACTOR:help}
\index{CUBE CONVERT /FACTOR option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/FACTOR} value
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FACTOR                     +blue{Explicitly define a unit conversion factor}

  This key gives the user the ability to do unsupported conversions.
  Thegiven value is used as a multiplicative factor over the whole cube
  and thenew unit is taken to be the unit given with /UNIT key.
  WARNING: No checksabout the validity of the conversion are performed.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VALUE                            +blue{Unit conversion factor}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CONVERT /EFFICIENCIES}
\label{sec:CUBE:CONVERT:EFFICIENCIES:help}
\index{CUBE CONVERT /EFFICIENCIES option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                       +blue{/EFFICIENCIES} Beff [Feff]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /EFFICIENCIES                              +blue{Convert to and From K (Ta*)}

  Specify the Beam and Forward efficiencies to use when converting to
  and from K (Ta*).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) BEFF                                    +blue{Beam efficiency}
  #2 (mandatory) FEFF                                 +blue{Forward efficiency}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{DETECT}
\label{sec:CUBE:DETECT:help}
\index{CUBE DETECT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                     [CUBE\]+blue{DETECT} [cube] [+blue{/SEGMENTS} first last]
                                               [+blue{/LINE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract  +blue{Split the data into detected signal voxels and residual ones}

  Select from a segmented SNR cube a segment range and create a cube of
  detected signal inside the corresponding island mask. The remainder
  is output into a residual cube.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *cube*                             +blue{Data cube}
  #2 (optional,read,imaset) *segments*                    +blue{Segment labels}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SEGMENTS           +blue{First and last segments to form the detection mask}
  /LINE        +blue{Set the velocity range of the spectral region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) detected                          +blue{Cube of detected signal}
  #2 (sameset) residuals                               +blue{Cube of residuals}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DETECT /SEGMENTS}
\label{sec:CUBE:DETECT:SEGMENTS:help}
\index{CUBE DETECT /SEGMENTS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SEGMENTS} first last
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SEGMENTS           +blue{First and last segments to form the detection mask}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                             +blue{first}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                               +blue{last}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DETECT /RANGE}
\label{sec:CUBE:DETECT:RANGE:help}
\index{CUBE DETECT /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax
--------------------------------------------------------------------------

  /RANGE has been renamed to /LINE and expects same arguments.

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{DETECT /LINE}
\label{sec:CUBE:DETECT:LINE:help}
\index{CUBE DETECT /LINE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                         +blue{/LINE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LINE        +blue{Set the velocity range of the spectral region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{EXTRACT}
\label{sec:CUBE:EXTRACT:help}
\index{CUBE EXTRACT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                [CUBE\]+blue{EXTRACT} [cube] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
                                      [+blue{/FREQUENCY} line frequency [unit]]
                  [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
                                                   [+blue{/LIKE} [referenceid]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                             +blue{Extract a subcube}

  The velocity range may be around the current reference frequency for
  the cube, or it can be around a new reference frequency (/FREQUENCY).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,subset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE                          +blue{Spectral range of the extracted region}
  /FREQUENCY          +blue{Line name & rest frequency of the extracted region}
  /CENTER                         +blue{Spatial center of the extracted region}
  /SIZE                             +blue{Spatial size of the extracted region}
  /LIKE                +blue{Define a reference header for the EXTRACT command}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) extracted,cube                             +blue{Extracted cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{EXTRACT /RANGE}
\label{sec:CUBE:EXTRACT:RANGE:help}
\index{CUBE EXTRACT /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE                          +blue{Spectral range of the extracted region}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{EXTRACT /FREQUENCY}
\label{sec:CUBE:EXTRACT:FREQUENCY:help}
\index{CUBE EXTRACT /FREQUENCY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                +blue{/FREQUENCY} line frequency [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FREQUENCY          +blue{Line name & rest frequency of the extracted region}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LINE                                          +blue{Line name}
  #2 (mandatory) FREQUENCY                                +blue{Line frequency}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                      +blue{Frequency unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     Hz

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{EXTRACT /CENTER}
\label{sec:CUBE:EXTRACT:CENTER:help}
\index{CUBE EXTRACT /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER                         +blue{Spatial center of the extracted region}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{EXTRACT /SIZE}
\label{sec:CUBE:EXTRACT:SIZE:help}
\index{CUBE EXTRACT /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE                             +blue{Spatial size of the extracted region}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{EXTRACT /LIKE}
\label{sec:CUBE:EXTRACT:LIKE:help}
\index{CUBE EXTRACT /LIKE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                             +blue{/LIKE} [referenceid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIKE                +blue{Define a reference header for the EXTRACT command}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,header,anyset) *                        +blue{Reference header}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{EXTREMA}
\label{sec:CUBE:EXTREMA:help}
\index{CUBE EXTREMA command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                           [CUBE\]+blue{EXTREMA} [cube]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                 +blue{Compute the extrema of a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,subset) *                                +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) *,extrema                       +blue{Cube with updated extrema}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{FEATHER}
\label{sec:CUBE:FEATHER:help}
\index{CUBE FEATHER command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                      [CUBE\]+blue{FEATHER} lores hires [+blue{/FACTOR} lofac]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract            +blue{Combine two cubes of different spatial resolutions}

  The combination is done on the UV plane via the fourier transform of
  the input images. lores must have a coarser spatial resolution than
  hires. lores and hires must have the same spectral and spatial
  gridding, this can be achieved using CUBE\RESAMPLE and CUBE\REPROJECT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,read,imaset) *cube*                +blue{Lower resolution cube}
  #2 (mandatory,read,imaset) *cube*               +blue{Higher resolution cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FACTOR                 +blue{Define a flux density scaling factor for LORES}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) feathered,cube                               +blue{Feather cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FEATHER /FACTOR}
\label{sec:CUBE:FEATHER:FACTOR:help}
\index{CUBE FEATHER /FACTOR option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/FACTOR} lofac
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FACTOR                 +blue{Define a flux density scaling factor for LORES}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LOFAC             +blue{flux density scaling factor for LORES}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{FILL}
\label{sec:CUBE:FILL:help}
\index{CUBE FILL command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                   [CUBE\]+blue{FILL} [cube] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
                  [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                                +blue{Fill a subcube}

  Fill a region with NaN
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,subset) *cube*                             +blue{Data cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE                                     +blue{Spectral range to be filled}
  /CENTER                            +blue{Spatial center of the filled region}
  /SIZE                                +blue{Spatial size of the filled region}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) filled,cube                                   +blue{Filled cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FILL /RANGE}
\label{sec:CUBE:FILL:RANGE:help}
\index{CUBE FILL /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE                                     +blue{Spectral range to be filled}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FILL /CENTER}
\label{sec:CUBE:FILL:CENTER:help}
\index{CUBE FILL /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER                            +blue{Spatial center of the filled region}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{FILL /SIZE}
\label{sec:CUBE:FILL:SIZE:help}
\index{CUBE FILL /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE                                +blue{Spatial size of the filled region}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{HEADER}
\label{sec:CUBE:HEADER:help}
\index{CUBE HEADER command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax[CUBE\]+blue{HEADER} [cube] [+blue{/FORMAT} format] [+blue{/DESCRIPTION} Description]
                                                              [+blue{/HISTORY}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                          +blue{List the cube header}

  The header can be shown in different formats by using option /FORMAT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,header,anyset) *                              +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FORMAT                           +blue{Select the format to list the header}
  /DESCRIPTION                             +blue{Select the format to describe}
  /HISTORY    +blue{In addition to the header, also display the cube ancestors}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HEADER /FORMAT}
\label{sec:CUBE:HEADER:FORMAT:help}
\index{CUBE HEADER /FORMAT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/FORMAT} format
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FORMAT                           +blue{Select the format to list the header}

  The are 3 possible formats: CUBE (default if option is not given),
  GDF (same as in VECTOR\GREG) and FITS (List the FITS file header)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FORMAT                    +blue{Listing format for the header}
     Possible values: CUBE, INTERFACE, FITS, CDF, GDF or VO

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HEADER /DESCRIPTION}
\label{sec:CUBE:HEADER:DESCRIPTION:help}
\index{CUBE HEADER /DESCRIPTION option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/DESCRIPTION} Description
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DESCRIPTION                             +blue{Select the format to describe}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) DESCRIPTION              +blue{Listing format to be described}
     Possible values: CUBE, INTERFACE, FITS, CDF, GDF or VO

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HEADER /HISTORY}
\label{sec:CUBE:HEADER:HISTORY:help}
\index{CUBE HEADER /HISTORY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                        +blue{/HISTORY}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /HISTORY    +blue{In addition to the header, also display the cube ancestors}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{LUMINOSITY}
\label{sec:CUBE:LUMINOSITY:help}
\index{CUBE LUMINOSITY command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax       [CUBE\]+blue{LUMINOSITY} [cubeid [noiseid]] [+blue{/SEGMENTS} [cubeid]]
         [+blue{/RANGE} v11 v12 [... [vn1 vn2]] [unit]] [+blue{/DISTANCE} dist [unit]]
                                                                [+blue{/X} val]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                        +blue{Compute the total luminosity of a cube}

  The distance to the source must be given. By default LUMINOSITY uses
  the Galactic CO to H2 conversion factor (2e20 (H2.cm-2) / (K.km/s))
  this can be changed by using of option /X.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *cube*                            +blue{Input cube}
  #2 (optional,read,imaset) *noise*                    +blue{Noise measurement}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SEGMENTS                       +blue{Compute the luminosity per SNR segment}
  /RANGE   +blue{Define the velocity range(s) over which to compute luminosity}
  /DISTANCE                            +blue{Define the distance do the source}
  /X                               +blue{Define the CO to h2 conversion factor}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (speset) luminosity                                 +blue{Luminosity cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LUMINOSITY /SEGMENTS}
\label{sec:CUBE:LUMINOSITY:SEGMENTS:help}
\index{CUBE LUMINOSITY /SEGMENTS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                              +blue{/SEGMENTS} [cubeid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SEGMENTS                       +blue{Compute the luminosity per SNR segment}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *segments*            +blue{Cube of segment labels}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LUMINOSITY /RANGE}
\label{sec:CUBE:LUMINOSITY:RANGE:help}
\index{CUBE LUMINOSITY /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                           +blue{/RANGE} v11 v12 [... [vn1 vn2]] [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE   +blue{Define the velocity range(s) over which to compute luminosity}

  Range(s) is (are) in velocity, multiple ranges are accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) V11                                +blue{Start of first range}
  #2 (mandatory) V12                                  +blue{End of first range}
  #3 (unlimited) VN1                                +blue{Start of n-eth range}
  #4 (unlimited) VN2                                  +blue{End of n-eth range}
  #5 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LUMINOSITY /DISTANCE}
\label{sec:CUBE:LUMINOSITY:DISTANCE:help}
\index{CUBE LUMINOSITY /DISTANCE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                           +blue{/DISTANCE} dist [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /DISTANCE                            +blue{Define the distance do the source}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) DIST                             +blue{Distance to the source}
  #2 (optional) UNIT                                       +blue{Distance unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     pc

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{LUMINOSITY /X}
\label{sec:CUBE:LUMINOSITY:X:help}
\index{CUBE LUMINOSITY /X option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/X} val
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /X                               +blue{Define the CO to h2 conversion factor}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VAL                          +blue{CO to h2 conversion factor}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{MODIFY}
\label{sec:CUBE:MODIFY:help}
\index{CUBE MODIFY command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax         [CUBE\]+blue{MODIFY} [cube] [+blue{/FREQUENCY} line frequency [unit]]
                   [+blue{/VSYS} velo [unit]] [+blue{/AXSET} mode] [+blue{/SPECAXIS} newaxis]
                                              [+blue{/REDSHIFT} z [convention]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                 +blue{Modify CUBE header coherently}

  CUBE\MODIFY is intended to make coherent modifications to a cube's
  header. If the cube' header contains incoherences, the EDIT language
  should be used to correct them.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,subset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FREQUENCY                            +blue{Modify rest frequency coherently}
  /VSYS                              +blue{Modify Systemic velocity coherently}
  /AXSET                                       +blue{Reshape the cube axes set}
  /SPECAXIS                                +blue{Modify the spectral axis kind}
  /REDSHIFT                                     +blue{Modify Systemic redshift}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) *,modified                                  +blue{Modified cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MODIFY /FREQUENCY}
\label{sec:CUBE:MODIFY:FREQUENCY:help}
\index{CUBE MODIFY /FREQUENCY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                +blue{/FREQUENCY} line frequency [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FREQUENCY                            +blue{Modify rest frequency coherently}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LINE                                          +blue{Line name}
  #2 (mandatory) FREQUENCY                                +blue{Line frequency}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                      +blue{Frequency unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     Hz

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MODIFY /VSYS}
\label{sec:CUBE:MODIFY:VSYS:help}
\index{CUBE MODIFY /VSYS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/VSYS} velo [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /VSYS                              +blue{Modify Systemic velocity coherently}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VSYS                              +blue{New systemic velocity}
  #2 (optional) UNIT                                       +blue{Velocity unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MODIFY /AXSET}
\label{sec:CUBE:MODIFY:AXSET:help}
\index{CUBE MODIFY /AXSET option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                     +blue{/AXSET} mode
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /AXSET                                       +blue{Reshape the cube axes set}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) MODE                         +blue{Axes set modification mode}
     Possible values: IGNOREDEGENERATE

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MODIFY /SPECAXIS}
\label{sec:CUBE:MODIFY:SPECAXIS:help}
\index{CUBE MODIFY /SPECAXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/SPECAXIS} newaxis
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SPECAXIS                                +blue{Modify the spectral axis kind}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NEWAXIS                   +blue{New kind of the spectral axis}
     Possible values: FREQUENCY, WAVELENGTH, VELOCITY or REDSHIFT

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MODIFY /REDSHIFT}
\label{sec:CUBE:MODIFY:REDSHIFT:help}
\index{CUBE MODIFY /REDSHIFT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/REDSHIFT} z [convention]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /REDSHIFT                                     +blue{Modify Systemic redshift}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) Z                                 +blue{New systemic redshift}
  #2 (optional) NEWAXIS                     +blue{Systemic redshift convention}
     Possible values: Unknown, Radio, Optical or Relativ

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{MOMENTS}
\label{sec:CUBE:MOMENTS:help}
\index{CUBE MOMENTS command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                             [CUBE\]+blue{MOMENTS} [signalid [noiseid]]
             [+blue{/RANGE} v11 v12 [... [vn1 vn2]] [unit]] [+blue{/WINDOWS} [windid]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract           +blue{Compute various moments for each spectrum of a cube}

  Compute the 3 first moments plus 3 associated quantities (peak
  intensity, integrated intensity, velocity at peak intensity, centroid
  velocity, velocity FWHM and equivalent width) for each spectrum in a
  cube. MOMENTS uses either a global window to compute the moments
  (/RANGE), or individual windows set for each spectrum (created by
  CUBE\WINDOW). The associated noise and signal-to-noise ratio of each
  moment are also computed.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
  #2 (optional,read,speset) *noise*                         +blue{Noise levels}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE      +blue{Define the velocity range(s) over which to compute moments}
  /WINDOWS                                 +blue{Use a window set per spectrum}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) moment,peak,brightness,signal      +blue{Peak brightness signal}
  #2 (sameset) moment,peak,brightness,noise        +blue{Peak brightness noise}
  #3 (sameset) moment,peak,brightness,snr            +blue{Peak brightness SNR}
  #4 (sameset) moment,peak,velocity,signal          +blue{Peak velocity signal}
  #5 (sameset) moment,peak,velocity,noise            +blue{Peak velocity noise}
  #6 (sameset) moment,peak,velocity,snr                +blue{Peak velocity SNR}
  #7 (sameset) moment,area,signal                            +blue{Area signal}
  #8 (sameset) moment,area,noise                              +blue{Area noise}
  #9 (sameset) moment,area,snr                                  +blue{Area SNR}
  #10 (sameset) moment,centroid,velocity,signal +blue{Centroid velocity signal}
  #11 (sameset) moment,centroid,velocity,noise   +blue{Centroid velocity noise}
  #12 (sameset) moment,centroid,velocity,snr       +blue{Centroid velocity SNR}
  #13 (sameset) moment,fwhm,width,signal                     +blue{FWHM signal}
  #14 (sameset) moment,fwhm,width,noise                       +blue{FWHM noise}
  #15 (sameset) moment,fwhm,width,snr                           +blue{FWHM SNR}
  #16 (sameset) moment,equivalent,width,signal   +blue{Equivalent width signal}
  #17 (sameset) moment,equivalent,width,noise     +blue{Equivalent width noise}
  #18 (sameset) moment,equivalent,width,snr         +blue{Equivalent width SNR}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MOMENTS /RANGE}
\label{sec:CUBE:MOMENTS:RANGE:help}
\index{CUBE MOMENTS /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                           +blue{/RANGE} v11 v12 [... [vn1 vn2]] [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE      +blue{Define the velocity range(s) over which to compute moments}

  Range(s) is (are) in velocity, multiple ranges are accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) V11                                +blue{Start of first range}
  #2 (mandatory) V12                                  +blue{End of first range}
  #3 (unlimited) VN1                                +blue{Start of n-eth range}
  #4 (unlimited) VN2                                  +blue{End of n-eth range}
  #5 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MOMENTS /WINDOWS}
\label{sec:CUBE:MOMENTS:WINDOWS:help}
\index{CUBE MOMENTS /WINDOWS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/WINDOWS} [windid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /WINDOWS                                 +blue{Use a window set per spectrum}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *window*                    +blue{Spectral windows}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{NOISE}
\label{sec:CUBE:NOISE:help}
\index{CUBE NOISE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                              [CUBE\]+blue{NOISE} [signalid [windowid]]
           [+blue{/RANGE} v11 v12 [... [vn1 vn2]] [unit]] [+blue{/MAD}] [+blue{/NCHAN} nchan]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract              +blue{Compute the noise RMS of each spectrum of a cube}

  NOISE uses either a global window to compute the moments (/RANGE), or
  individual windows set for each spectrum (created by CUBE\WINDOW).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *cube*                         +blue{Signal cubeid}
  #2 (optional,read,speset) *window*  +blue{Local spectral range(s) containing}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE               +blue{Define global spectral range(s) containing signal}
  /MAD            +blue{Compute Median Absolute Deviation noise instead of RMS}
  /NCHAN    +blue{Number of channels in each block to be used to compute noise}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) noise                           +blue{Cube of noise estimations}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{NOISE /RANGE}
\label{sec:CUBE:NOISE:RANGE:help}
\index{CUBE NOISE /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                           +blue{/RANGE} v11 v12 [... [vn1 vn2]] [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE               +blue{Define global spectral range(s) containing signal}

  Range(s) is (are) in velocity, multiple ranges are accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) V11                                +blue{Start of first range}
  #2 (mandatory) V12                                  +blue{End of first range}
  #3 (unlimited) VN1                                +blue{Start of n-eth range}
  #4 (unlimited) VN2                                  +blue{End of n-eth range}
  #5 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{NOISE /MAD}
\label{sec:CUBE:NOISE:MAD:help}
\index{CUBE NOISE /MAD option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                            +blue{/MAD}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MAD            +blue{Compute Median Absolute Deviation noise instead of RMS}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{NOISE /NCHAN}
\label{sec:CUBE:NOISE:NCHAN:help}
\index{CUBE NOISE /NCHAN option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/NCHAN} nchan
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NCHAN    +blue{Number of channels in each block to be used to compute noise}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NCHAN                                +blue{number of channels}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{POLAR}
\label{sec:CUBE:POLAR:help}
\index{CUBE POLAR command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax             [CUBE\]+blue{POLAR} [cube] [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                   +blue{Reproject data on polar spatial coordinates}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *                                +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER                          +blue{Center of the polar coordinate system}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) polar                          +blue{The polar coordinates cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{POLAR /CENTER}
\label{sec:CUBE:POLAR:CENTER:help}
\index{CUBE POLAR /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER                          +blue{Center of the polar coordinate system}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{REPLACE}
\label{sec:CUBE:REPLACE:help}
\index{CUBE REPLACE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                        [CUBE\]+blue{REPLACE} [cube] [+blue{/VALUE} ival oval]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                    +blue{Replace a value by another one in the data}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,subset) *                                 +blue{Input CUBE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /VALUE                 +blue{Define value to be replaced and its replacement}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) *,replaced                      +blue{Cube with replaced values}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{REPLACE /VALUE}
\label{sec:CUBE:REPLACE:VALUE:help}
\index{CUBE REPLACE /VALUE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                +blue{/VALUE} ival oval
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /VALUE                 +blue{Define value to be replaced and its replacement}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) IVAL                               +blue{Value to be replaced}
     Possible values: ival, NaN
  #2 (mandatory) OVAL                              +blue{Value to replace with}
     Possible values: oval, NaN

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{REPROJECT}
\label{sec:CUBE:REPROJECT:help}
\index{CUBE REPROJECT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax         [CUBE\]+blue{REPROJECT} [cube] [+blue{/SPATIALFRAME} frame [equinox]]
                              [+blue{/PTYPE} type] [+blue{/PCENTER} l0 m0 type [unit]]
                   [+blue{/PANGLE} pang [paunit]] [+blue{/LAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]]
                              [+blue{/MAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]] [+blue{/LIKE} cube]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                          +blue{Reproject the spatial grid of a cube}

  At least one option must be given. Options /SPATIALFRAME,
  /PROJECTION, /LAXIS and /MAXIS can be specified at the same time.  If
  the /LIKE option is given all other options are ignored
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SPATIALFRAME         +blue{Define the spatial frame of the reprojected cube}
  /PTYPE                                  +blue{Define the new projection type}
  /PCENTER                              +blue{Define the new projection center}
  /PANGLE                                +blue{Define the new projection angle}
  /LAXIS                       +blue{Define the l axis of the reprojected cube}
  /MAXIS                       +blue{Define the m axis of the reprojected cube}
  /LIKE                 +blue{Reproject onto the same grid as a reference cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) reprojected,cube                         +blue{Reprojected cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{REPROJECT /SPATIALFRAME}
\label{sec:CUBE:REPROJECT:SPATIALFRAME:help}
\index{CUBE REPROJECT /SPATIALFRAME option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/SPATIALFRAME} frame [equinox]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SPATIALFRAME         +blue{Define the spatial frame of the reprojected cube}

  Frame can be Equatorial, Galactic, ICRS or Unknown
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) TYPE                              +blue{type of spatial frame}
     Possible values: UNKNOWN, EQUATORIAL, GALACTIC, HORIZONTAL or ICRS
  #2 (optional) EQUINOX      +blue{Equinox of the spatial frame, if equatorial}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{REPROJECT /PTYPE}
\label{sec:CUBE:REPROJECT:PTYPE:help}
\index{CUBE REPROJECT /PTYPE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                     +blue{/PTYPE} type
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PTYPE                                  +blue{Define the new projection type}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) TYPE                                    +blue{Projection type}
     Possible values: GNOMONIC, ORTHOGRAPHIC, AZIMUTHAL, STEREOGRAPHIC,
     LAMBERT, AITOFF, RADIO, SFL, MOLLWEIDE, NCP or CARTESIAN

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{REPROJECT /PCENTER}
\label{sec:CUBE:REPROJECT:PCENTER:help}
\index{CUBE REPROJECT /PCENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                      +blue{/PCENTER} l0 m0 type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PCENTER                              +blue{Define the new projection center}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) L0                   +blue{l Coordinate for projection center}
  #2 (mandatory) M0                   +blue{m Coordinate for projection center}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: Absolute or Relative
  #4 (optional) UNIT                                  +blue{Unit for l0 and m0}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{REPROJECT /PANGLE}
\label{sec:CUBE:REPROJECT:PANGLE:help}
\index{CUBE REPROJECT /PANGLE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                           +blue{/PANGLE} pang [paunit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PANGLE                                +blue{Define the new projection angle}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) PANG                           +blue{Projection position angle}
  #2 (optional) PAUNIT                               +blue{Position angle unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian or degree

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{REPROJECT /LAXIS}
\label{sec:CUBE:REPROJECT:LAXIS:help}
\index{CUBE REPROJECT /LAXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                     +blue{/LAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LAXIS                       +blue{Define the l axis of the reprojected cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) N                            +blue{number of elements in axis}
  #2 (mandatory) REF                                +blue{Axis reference point}
  #3 (mandatory) VAL                       +blue{Axis value at reference point}
  #4 (mandatory) INC                                      +blue{Axis increment}
  #5 (optional) UNIT                                +blue{Unit for val and inc}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{REPROJECT /MAXIS}
\label{sec:CUBE:REPROJECT:MAXIS:help}
\index{CUBE REPROJECT /MAXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                     +blue{/MAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MAXIS                       +blue{Define the m axis of the reprojected cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) N                            +blue{number of elements in axis}
  #2 (mandatory) REF                                +blue{Axis reference point}
  #3 (mandatory) VAL                       +blue{Axis value at reference point}
  #4 (mandatory) INC                                      +blue{Axis increment}
  #5 (optional) UNIT                                +blue{Unit for val and inc}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{REPROJECT /LIKE}
\label{sec:CUBE:REPROJECT:LIKE:help}
\index{CUBE REPROJECT /LIKE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/LIKE} cube
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIKE                 +blue{Reproject onto the same grid as a reference cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,header,imaset) *cube*                     +blue{Reference cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{RESAMPLE}
\label{sec:CUBE:RESAMPLE:help}
\index{CUBE RESAMPLE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                  [CUBE\]+blue{RESAMPLE} [cubeid] [+blue{/LIKE} [referenceid]]
             [+blue{/FAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]] [+blue{/VAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                    +blue{Spectrally resample a cube}

  The resampling can be done on the velocity or frequency axes.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIKE               +blue{Define a reference header for the RESAMPLE command}
  /FAXIS                 +blue{Define the frequency axis of the resampled cube}
  /VAXIS                  +blue{Define the velocity axis of the resampled cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) resampled,cube                             +blue{Resampled cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{RESAMPLE /LIKE}
\label{sec:CUBE:RESAMPLE:LIKE:help}
\index{CUBE RESAMPLE /LIKE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                             +blue{/LIKE} [referenceid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIKE               +blue{Define a reference header for the RESAMPLE command}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,header,anyset) *                        +blue{Reference header}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{RESAMPLE /FAXIS}
\label{sec:CUBE:RESAMPLE:FAXIS:help}
\index{CUBE RESAMPLE /FAXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                     +blue{/FAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FAXIS                 +blue{Define the frequency axis of the resampled cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) N                            +blue{number of elements in axis}
  #2 (mandatory) REF                                +blue{Axis reference point}
  #3 (mandatory) VAL                       +blue{Axis value at reference point}
  #4 (mandatory) INC                                      +blue{Axis increment}
  #5 (optional) UNIT                                +blue{Unit for val and inc}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     Hz

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{RESAMPLE /VAXIS}
\label{sec:CUBE:RESAMPLE:VAXIS:help}
\index{CUBE RESAMPLE /VAXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                     +blue{/VAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /VAXIS                  +blue{Define the velocity axis of the resampled cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) N                            +blue{number of elements in axis}
  #2 (mandatory) REF                                +blue{Axis reference point}
  #3 (mandatory) VAL                       +blue{Axis value at reference point}
  #4 (mandatory) INC                                      +blue{Axis increment}
  #5 (optional) UNIT                                +blue{Unit for val and inc}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{ROTATE}
\label{sec:CUBE:ROTATE:help}
\index{CUBE ROTATE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                [CUBE\]+blue{ROTATE} [cube] [+blue{/CENTER} l0 m0 type [unit]]
                                                  [+blue{/ANGLE} pang [paunit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                 +blue{Rotate a cube around a center}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER                        +blue{Define the center about which to rotate}
  /ANGLE                                 +blue{Define the new projection angle}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) rotated,cube                                 +blue{Rotated cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{ROTATE /CENTER}
\label{sec:CUBE:ROTATE:CENTER:help}
\index{CUBE ROTATE /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                       +blue{/CENTER} l0 m0 type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER                        +blue{Define the center about which to rotate}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) L0                   +blue{l Coordinate for projection center}
  #2 (mandatory) M0                   +blue{m Coordinate for projection center}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: Absolute or Relative
  #4 (optional) UNIT                                  +blue{Unit for l0 and m0}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{ROTATE /ANGLE}
\label{sec:CUBE:ROTATE:ANGLE:help}
\index{CUBE ROTATE /ANGLE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/ANGLE} pang [paunit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ANGLE                                 +blue{Define the new projection angle}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) PANG                           +blue{Projection position angle}
  #2 (optional) PAUNIT                               +blue{Position angle unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian or degree

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{SEGMENT}
\label{sec:CUBE:SEGMENT:help}
\index{CUBE SEGMENT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                          [CUBE\]+blue{SEGMENT} [snrid] [+blue{/MINSNR} value]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract +blue{Segment a SNR cube into contiguous regions of decreasing valu}

  This command requires that the input cube fits into theRAM memory of
  your computer.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,fullset) *snr*                              +blue{SNR cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MINSNR                     +blue{Minimum SNR value when segmenting the cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) segments                                   +blue{Segmented cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SEGMENT /MINSNR}
\label{sec:CUBE:SEGMENT:MINSNR:help}
\index{CUBE SEGMENT /MINSNR option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/MINSNR} value
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MINSNR                     +blue{Minimum SNR value when segmenting the cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) MINSNR                                +blue{Minimum SNR value}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{SHUFFLE}
\label{sec:CUBE:SHUFFLE:help}
\index{CUBE SHUFFLE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax     [CUBE\]+blue{SHUFFLE} [cubeid [velocityid]] [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                           +blue{Shuffle the spectral axis of a cube}

  Circularly shift each spectrum by a user defined velocity given as an
  image of velocities. A linear interpolation of the channels is done
  when required. This enables the user to, e.g., remove systematic
  velocity gradients before stacking spectra. By default, the command
  will search for the peak velocity images computed by the MOMENT
  command.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
  #2 (optional,read,speset) *moment,peak,velocity,signal* +blue{Centroid image}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) shuffled,cube                               +blue{Shuffled cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SHUFFLE /SIZE}
\label{sec:CUBE:SHUFFLE:SIZE:help}
\index{CUBE SHUFFLE /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SHUFFLE /CENTER}
\label{sec:CUBE:SHUFFLE:CENTER:help}
\index{CUBE SHUFFLE /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SHUFFLE /RANGE}
\label{sec:CUBE:SHUFFLE:RANGE:help}
\index{CUBE SHUFFLE /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{SLICE}
\label{sec:CUBE:SLICE:help}
\index{CUBE SLICE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax              [CUBE\]+blue{SLICE} [cube] [+blue{/BEGIN} lpos mpos type [unit]]
                            [+blue{/END} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/POSFILE} file]
                                                  [+blue{/VARIABLE} var [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract              +blue{Extract a 2D Position-Velocity slice from a cube}

  Extract a contiguous Position Velocity slice from cubname along the
  line that connects /BEGIN to /END, or a non contiguous Position
  velocity slice from points in a /VARIABLE or in a /POSFILE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BEGIN                                    +blue{Beginning point of the slice}
  /END                                            +blue{End point of the slice}
  /POSFILE                          +blue{File with the position for the slice}
  /VARIABLE                      +blue{Variable containing positions for slice}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (fullset) slice                                        +blue{The 2D slice}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SLICE /BEGIN}
\label{sec:CUBE:SLICE:BEGIN:help}
\index{CUBE SLICE /BEGIN option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                    +blue{/BEGIN} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BEGIN                                    +blue{Beginning point of the slice}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SLICE /END}
\label{sec:CUBE:SLICE:END:help}
\index{CUBE SLICE /END option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                      +blue{/END} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /END                                            +blue{End point of the slice}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SLICE /POSFILE}
\label{sec:CUBE:SLICE:POSFILE:help}
\index{CUBE SLICE /POSFILE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/POSFILE} file
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /POSFILE                          +blue{File with the position for the slice}

  Slices computed from a position file can be non contiguous. The slice
  will contain only the points described in the position file. The
  position file should be formatted as a series of lines, each line
  containing a single position. The syntax for describing a position is
  the same as the syntax for options /BEGIN and /END.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FILE                               +blue{Slice positions file}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SLICE /VARIABLE}
\label{sec:CUBE:SLICE:VARIABLE:help}
\index{CUBE SLICE /VARIABLE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/VARIABLE} var [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /VARIABLE                      +blue{Variable containing positions for slice}

  The variable containing the positions must be REAL and have the shape
  [2,n], where n is the number of points in the slice nad the first
  dimension correspond to the x and y positions of each point. The
  points are assumed to be in relative coordinates from the projection
  center. The default unit for the coordinates is the current FOV unit,
  this can be changed with the optional argument unit
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VAR                   +blue{SIC variable containing positions}
  #2 (optional) UNIT                            +blue{Position coordinate unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{SMOOTH}
\label{sec:CUBE:SMOOTH:help}
\index{CUBE SMOOTH command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            [CUBE\]+blue{SMOOTH} [cube]
                           [+blue{/GAUSS} major [minor [unit [pang [paunit]]]]]
               [+blue{/BEAM} major [minor [unit [pang [paunit]]]]] [+blue{/LIKE} cube]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                       +blue{Spatially smooth a cube}

  The smoothing is based on a gaussian kernel. This gaussian kernel can
  be given directly (/GAUSS) or can be determined from a desired
  spatial resolution, either provided by the user (/BEAM) or from
  another cube (/LIKE)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /GAUSS                            +blue{Define the gaussian smoothing kernel}
  /BEAM                            +blue{Define the desired spatial resolution}
  /LIKE                +blue{Smooth to the same resolution as a reference cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) smoothed,cube                           +blue{The smoothed cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SMOOTH /GAUSS}
\label{sec:CUBE:SMOOTH:GAUSS:help}
\index{CUBE SMOOTH /GAUSS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                     +blue{/GAUSS} major [minor [unit [pang [paunit]]]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /GAUSS                            +blue{Define the gaussian smoothing kernel}

  If major or minor axis are *, the current beamsize is assumed.If
  minor axis is omited it is assumed to be equal to the major axis,
  i.e. a circle. If pang is omited an angle of 0 degrees from north is
  assumed.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) MAJOR                                        +blue{Major axis}
  #2 (optional) MINOR                                         +blue{Minor axis}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Axes unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec
  #4 (optional) PANG                                      +blue{Position angle}
  #5 (optional) PAUNIT                                         +blue{pang unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian or degree

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SMOOTH /BEAM}
\label{sec:CUBE:SMOOTH:BEAM:help}
\index{CUBE SMOOTH /BEAM option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                      +blue{/BEAM} major [minor [unit [pang [paunit]]]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BEAM                            +blue{Define the desired spatial resolution}

  If only the major axis is given the beam is assumed circular and
  hence minor = major
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) MAJOR                                   +blue{Beam major axis}
  #2 (optional) MINOR                                    +blue{Beam minor axis}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                      +blue{Beam axes unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec
  #4 (optional) PANG                                 +blue{Beam position angle}
  #5 (optional) PAUNIT                               +blue{Position angle unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian or degree

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SMOOTH /LIKE}
\label{sec:CUBE:SMOOTH:LIKE:help}
\index{CUBE SMOOTH /LIKE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/LIKE} cube
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIKE                +blue{Smooth to the same resolution as a reference cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,header,imaset/speset) *cube*              +blue{Reference cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{SNR}
\label{sec:CUBE:SNR:help}
\index{CUBE SNR command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                     [CUBE\]+blue{SNR} [signal [noise]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                             +blue{Compute the signal to noise ratio}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *cube*                         +blue{Signal cubeid}
  #2 (optional,read,speset) *noise*                         +blue{Noise cubeid}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) snr                        +blue{Cube of Signal-to-Noise Ratios}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{SORT}
\label{sec:CUBE:SORT:help}
\index{CUBE SORT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                   [CUBE\]+blue{SORT} [cube] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract               +blue{Sort the intensities of each spectrum of a cube}

  The sorting starts from the channel of maximum brightness and then
  sorts the most contiguous channels by decreasing brightness.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE                    +blue{Define the velocity range over which to sort}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) sorted                                        +blue{Sorted cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{SORT /RANGE}
\label{sec:CUBE:SORT:RANGE:help}
\index{CUBE SORT /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE                    +blue{Define the velocity range over which to sort}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{STACK}
\label{sec:CUBE:STACK:help}
\index{CUBE STACK command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                [CUBE\]+blue{STACK} [cubeid [noiseid]] [+blue{/MASK} [maskid]]
                  [+blue{/RANGE} v11 v12 [... [vn1 vn2]] [unit]] [+blue{/SUM}] [+blue{/MEAN}]
                                   [+blue{/WEIGHT} scheme] [+blue{/IMAGE}] [+blue{/SPECTRUM}]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                       +blue{Stack spectra or images}

  Stacking spectra is the default. Output unit is determined by the
  type of stacking.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset/speset) *cube*                    +blue{Signal cube}
  #2 (optional,read,imaset/speset) *noise*           +blue{Noise image or cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MASK +blue{Use a mask to define selected pixels or channels during stacking}
  /RANGE                                   +blue{Velocity range(s) of interest}
  /SUM                               +blue{Output the sum of spectra or images}
  /MEAN                             +blue{Output the mean of spectra or images}
  /WEIGHT                          +blue{Weighting scheme used during stacking}
  /IMAGE                               +blue{Stack images into an output image}
  /SPECTRUM                        +blue{Stack spectra into an output spectrum}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (imaset/speset) stacked,imag/spectr       +blue{Stacked spectrum or image}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STACK /MASK}
\label{sec:CUBE:STACK:MASK:help}
\index{CUBE STACK /MASK option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/MASK} [maskid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MASK +blue{Use a mask to define selected pixels or channels during stacking}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset/speset) *mask*      +blue{Mask cube can be 2D or 3D}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STACK /RANGE}
\label{sec:CUBE:STACK:RANGE:help}
\index{CUBE STACK /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                           +blue{/RANGE} v11 v12 [... [vn1 vn2]] [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE                                   +blue{Velocity range(s) of interest}

  Range(s) is (are) in velocity, multiple ranges are accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) V11                                +blue{Start of first range}
  #2 (mandatory) V12                                  +blue{End of first range}
  #3 (unlimited) VN1                                +blue{Start of n-eth range}
  #4 (unlimited) VN2                                  +blue{End of n-eth range}
  #5 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STACK /SUM}
\label{sec:CUBE:STACK:SUM:help}
\index{CUBE STACK /SUM option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                            +blue{/SUM}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SUM                               +blue{Output the sum of spectra or images}

  Output unit is Jy for a spectral stack and <CubUnit>.km/s for a
  spatial stack

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STACK /MEAN}
\label{sec:CUBE:STACK:MEAN:help}
\index{CUBE STACK /MEAN option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                           +blue{/MEAN}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MEAN                             +blue{Output the mean of spectra or images}

  Output unit is K when stacking spectra and <CubUnit> when stacking
  images

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STACK /WEIGHT}
\label{sec:CUBE:STACK:WEIGHT:help}
\index{CUBE STACK /WEIGHT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/WEIGHT} scheme
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /WEIGHT                          +blue{Weighting scheme used during stacking}

  Only valid for /SPECTRUM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SCHEME                                 +blue{Weighting scheme}
     Possible values: Equal or Noise

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STACK /IMAGE}
\label{sec:CUBE:STACK:IMAGE:help}
\index{CUBE STACK /IMAGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                          +blue{/IMAGE}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /IMAGE                               +blue{Stack images into an output image}

  Default behaviour is /SUM

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STACK /SPECTRUM}
\label{sec:CUBE:STACK:SPECTRUM:help}
\index{CUBE STACK /SPECTRUM option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                       +blue{/SPECTRUM}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SPECTRUM                        +blue{Stack spectra into an output spectrum}

  Default behaviour is /SUM for Jy/beam spectra and /MEAN for K(Tmb)
  spectra

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{STITCH}
\label{sec:CUBE:STITCH:help}
\index{CUBE STITCH command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                       [CUBE\]+blue{STITCH} [+blue{/FAMILY} name] [+blue{/LIKE} cube]
                                      [+blue{/FREQUENCY} line frequency [unit]]
             [+blue{/FAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]] [+blue{/VAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]]
                              [+blue{/PTYPE} type] [+blue{/PCENTER} l0 m0 type [unit]]
                   [+blue{/PANGLE} pang [paunit]] [+blue{/LAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]]
                                           [+blue{/MAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]]
                                     [+blue{/ALIGN} FREQUENCY|VELOCITY|CHANNEL]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                           +blue{Stitch cubes from the current index}

  Stitch the cubes in the current index. The stitching can be
  spectrally aligned by usign option /ALIGN. Several aspects of the
  output cube can be controlled: its axes (/LAXIS, /MAXIS, /FAXIS and
  /VAXIS), its projection (/PTYPE, /PCENTER and /PANGLE) as well as its
  reference frequency and line. A reference cube can be used to define
  the spectral and spatial characteristics of the stitched cube
  (/LIKE). If no options are given the axes will be chosen in a way to
  cover all the data in all cubes in the index. By default the family
  name of the output cube will be the same of the first cube in the
  current index, this can be changed with the usage of option /FAMILY.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FAMILY               +blue{Define the new family name for stitched products}
  /LIKE                               +blue{Merge headers onto a template cube}
  /FREQUENCY         +blue{Define line name and frequency of the stitched cube}
  /FAXIS                  +blue{Define the frequency axis of the stitched cube}
  /VAXIS                   +blue{Define the velocity axis of the stitched cube}
  /PTYPE                                  +blue{Define the new projection type}
  /PCENTER                              +blue{Define the new projection center}
  /PANGLE                                +blue{Define the new projection angle}
  /LAXIS                          +blue{Define the L axis of the stitched cube}
  /MAXIS                          +blue{Define the M axis of the stitched cube}
  /ALIGN                              +blue{Define the spectral axis alignment}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) merged,cube                                 +blue{stitched cube}
  #2 (sameset) stitched,cube                            +blue{The average cube}
  #3 (sameset) stitched,weight                           +blue{The weight cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STITCH /FAMILY}
\label{sec:CUBE:STITCH:FAMILY:help}
\index{CUBE STITCH /FAMILY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/FAMILY} name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FAMILY               +blue{Define the new family name for stitched products}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) IDENTIFIER                               +blue{New identifier}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STITCH /LIKE}
\label{sec:CUBE:STITCH:LIKE:help}
\index{CUBE STITCH /LIKE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                      +blue{/LIKE} cube
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LIKE                               +blue{Merge headers onto a template cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,header,subset) *cube*                     +blue{Reference cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STITCH /FREQUENCY}
\label{sec:CUBE:STITCH:FREQUENCY:help}
\index{CUBE STITCH /FREQUENCY option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                +blue{/FREQUENCY} line frequency [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FREQUENCY         +blue{Define line name and frequency of the stitched cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LINE                                          +blue{Line name}
  #2 (mandatory) FREQUENCY                                +blue{Line frequency}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                      +blue{Frequency unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     Hz

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STITCH /FAXIS}
\label{sec:CUBE:STITCH:FAXIS:help}
\index{CUBE STITCH /FAXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                     +blue{/FAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FAXIS                  +blue{Define the frequency axis of the stitched cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) N                            +blue{number of elements in axis}
  #2 (mandatory) REF                                +blue{Axis reference point}
  #3 (mandatory) VAL                       +blue{Axis value at reference point}
  #4 (mandatory) INC                                      +blue{Axis increment}
  #5 (optional) UNIT                                +blue{Unit for val and inc}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     Hz

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STITCH /VAXIS}
\label{sec:CUBE:STITCH:VAXIS:help}
\index{CUBE STITCH /VAXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                     +blue{/VAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /VAXIS                   +blue{Define the velocity axis of the stitched cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) N                            +blue{number of elements in axis}
  #2 (mandatory) REF                                +blue{Axis reference point}
  #3 (mandatory) VAL                       +blue{Axis value at reference point}
  #4 (mandatory) INC                                      +blue{Axis increment}
  #5 (optional) UNIT                                +blue{Unit for val and inc}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     Hz

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STITCH /PTYPE}
\label{sec:CUBE:STITCH:PTYPE:help}
\index{CUBE STITCH /PTYPE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                     +blue{/PTYPE} type
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PTYPE                                  +blue{Define the new projection type}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) TYPE                                    +blue{Projection type}
     Possible values: GNOMONIC, ORTHOGRAPHIC, AZIMUTHAL, STEREOGRAPHIC,
     LAMBERT, AITOFF, RADIO, SFL, MOLLWEIDE, NCP or CARTESIAN

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STITCH /PCENTER}
\label{sec:CUBE:STITCH:PCENTER:help}
\index{CUBE STITCH /PCENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                      +blue{/PCENTER} l0 m0 type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PCENTER                              +blue{Define the new projection center}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) L0                   +blue{l Coordinate for projection center}
  #2 (mandatory) M0                   +blue{m Coordinate for projection center}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: Absolute or Relative
  #4 (optional) UNIT                                  +blue{Unit for l0 and m0}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STITCH /PANGLE}
\label{sec:CUBE:STITCH:PANGLE:help}
\index{CUBE STITCH /PANGLE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                           +blue{/PANGLE} pang [paunit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PANGLE                                +blue{Define the new projection angle}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) PANG                           +blue{Projection position angle}
  #2 (optional) PAUNIT                               +blue{Position angle unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian or degree

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STITCH /LAXIS}
\label{sec:CUBE:STITCH:LAXIS:help}
\index{CUBE STITCH /LAXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                     +blue{/LAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LAXIS                          +blue{Define the L axis of the stitched cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) N                            +blue{number of elements in axis}
  #2 (mandatory) REF                                +blue{Axis reference point}
  #3 (mandatory) VAL                       +blue{Axis value at reference point}
  #4 (mandatory) INC                                      +blue{Axis increment}
  #5 (optional) UNIT                                +blue{Unit for val and inc}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STITCH /MAXIS}
\label{sec:CUBE:STITCH:MAXIS:help}
\index{CUBE STITCH /MAXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                     +blue{/MAXIS} n ref val inc [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MAXIS                          +blue{Define the M axis of the stitched cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) N                            +blue{number of elements in axis}
  #2 (mandatory) REF                                +blue{Axis reference point}
  #3 (mandatory) VAL                       +blue{Axis value at reference point}
  #4 (mandatory) INC                                      +blue{Axis increment}
  #5 (optional) UNIT                                +blue{Unit for val and inc}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{STITCH /ALIGN}
\label{sec:CUBE:STITCH:ALIGN:help}
\index{CUBE STITCH /ALIGN option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                               +blue{/ALIGN} FREQUENCY|VELOCITY|CHANNEL
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ALIGN                              +blue{Define the spectral axis alignment}

  Define over which spectral axes the cubes will be aligned to produce
  the stitched cube. The default alignment  is FREQUENCY. When the
  alignment is FREQUENCY option /VAXIS  is ignored, When the aligment
  is VELOCITY option /FAXIS is ignored, and finally when the alignment
  is CHANNEL both  /VAXIS and /FAXIS are ignored.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ALIGNMENT                                +blue{Alignment type}
     Possible values: FREQUENCY, VELOCITY or CHANNEL

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{WINDOW}
\label{sec:CUBE:WINDOW:help}
\index{CUBE WINDOW command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax    [CUBE\]+blue{WINDOW} [cube] [+blue{/RANGE} v11 v12 [... [vn1 vn2]] [unit]]
                                                         [+blue{/NITER} number]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract            +blue{Find the signal windows of each spectrum of a cube}

  A window is a set of contiguous channels going to the 0 level
  starting from the spectrum maximum brightness
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE                  +blue{Define the velocity range(s) containing signal}
  /NITER                           +blue{Set the number of windows to be found}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) window                                    +blue{Cube of windows}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{WINDOW /RANGE}
\label{sec:CUBE:WINDOW:RANGE:help}
\index{CUBE WINDOW /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                           +blue{/RANGE} v11 v12 [... [vn1 vn2]] [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE                  +blue{Define the velocity range(s) containing signal}

  Range(s) is (are) in velocity, multiple ranges are accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) V11                                +blue{Start of first range}
  #2 (mandatory) V12                                  +blue{End of first range}
  #3 (unlimited) VN1                                +blue{Start of n-eth range}
  #4 (unlimited) VN2                                  +blue{End of n-eth range}
  #5 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{WINDOW /NITER}
\label{sec:CUBE:WINDOW:NITER:help}
\index{CUBE WINDOW /NITER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/NITER} number
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NITER                           +blue{Set the number of windows to be found}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) NITER                                 +blue{Number of windows}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\section{MASK Language On-Line Help}
\label{sec:MASK:help}
\index{MASK command list}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  MASK\                                  +blue{Commands to interact with masks}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  CUBE                    +blue{Mask a cube following a reference mask pattern}
  ERODE                                      +blue{Compute the ERODE of a cube}
  INVERT                                    +blue{Compute the INVERT of a cube}
  POLY2MASK                            +blue{Transfer a polygon onto a 2D mask}
  VELOCITY +blue{Mask a spectral cube around each frequency following a mask v}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{CUBE}
\label{sec:MASK:CUBE:help}
\index{MASK CUBE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax    [MASK\]+blue{CUBE} [cubeid] [+blue{/MASK} [maskid]] [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                +blue{Mask a cube following a reference mask pattern}

  Input and output cubes must be real
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *                                 +blue{Input cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MASK                                                     +blue{Mask pattern}
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) masked                                        +blue{Masked cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CUBE /MASK}
\label{sec:MASK:CUBE:MASK:help}
\index{MASK CUBE /MASK option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/MASK} [maskid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MASK                                                     +blue{Mask pattern}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *mask*             +blue{Mask cube can be 2D or 3D}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CUBE /SIZE}
\label{sec:MASK:CUBE:SIZE:help}
\index{MASK CUBE /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CUBE /CENTER}
\label{sec:MASK:CUBE:CENTER:help}
\index{MASK CUBE /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{CUBE /RANGE}
\label{sec:MASK:CUBE:RANGE:help}
\index{MASK CUBE /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{ERODE}
\label{sec:MASK:ERODE:help}
\index{MASK ERODE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                  [MASK\]+blue{ERODE} input cube [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                   +blue{Compute the ERODE of a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *                            +blue{input cube cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) eroded,mask                  +blue{Output cube of the operation}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{ERODE /SIZE}
\label{sec:MASK:ERODE:SIZE:help}
\index{MASK ERODE /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{ERODE /CENTER}
\label{sec:MASK:ERODE:CENTER:help}
\index{MASK ERODE /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{ERODE /RANGE}
\label{sec:MASK:ERODE:RANGE:help}
\index{MASK ERODE /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{INVERT}
\label{sec:MASK:INVERT:help}
\index{MASK INVERT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                 [MASK\]+blue{INVERT} input mask [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                  +blue{Compute the INVERT of a cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *                            +blue{input mask cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) inverted,mask                +blue{Output cube of the operation}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{INVERT /SIZE}
\label{sec:MASK:INVERT:SIZE:help}
\index{MASK INVERT /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{INVERT /CENTER}
\label{sec:MASK:INVERT:CENTER:help}
\index{MASK INVERT /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{INVERT /RANGE}
\label{sec:MASK:INVERT:RANGE:help}
\index{MASK INVERT /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{POLY2MASK}
\label{sec:MASK:POLY2MASK:help}
\index{MASK POLY2MASK command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax  [MASK\]+blue{POLY2MASK} [cubeid] [+blue{/FILE} filename] [+blue{/VARIABLE} varname]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                             +blue{Transfer a polygon onto a 2D mask}

  Create a 2D mask with the L and M properties of cubename, based on
  the shape of a polygon. The polygon is read from either a polygon
  file (/FILE) or from a SIC variable (/VARIABLE)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,header,imaset/speset) *cube*                  +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FILE                                   +blue{Polygon is fetched from a file}
  /VARIABLE                       +blue{Polygon is fetched from a SIC variable}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (imaset) mask                                         +blue{The mask cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{POLY2MASK /FILE}
\label{sec:MASK:POLY2MASK:FILE:help}
\index{MASK POLY2MASK /FILE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/FILE} filename
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FILE                                   +blue{Polygon is fetched from a file}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FILENAME        +blue{Name of the file containing the polygon}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{POLY2MASK /VARIABLE}
\label{sec:MASK:POLY2MASK:VARIABLE:help}
\index{MASK POLY2MASK /VARIABLE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/VARIABLE} varname
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /VARIABLE                       +blue{Polygon is fetched from a SIC variable}

  The SIC varaible can be created by using the command GREG2\POLYGON or
  by hand using a SIC structure. For a description of the SIC structure
  to be used see: HELP GREG2\POLYGON
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VARNAME     +blue{Name of the variable containing the polygon}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{VELOCITY}
\label{sec:MASK:VELOCITY:help}
\index{MASK VELOCITY command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax      [MASK\]+blue{VELOCITY} [cubeid] [+blue{/MASK} [maskid]] [+blue{/FREQVAR} value]
                  [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]] [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]]
                                              [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract +blue{Mask a spectral cube around each frequency following a mask v}

  Input and output cubes must be real
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *                                 +blue{Input cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MASK                                            +blue{Mask velocity pattern}
  /FREQVAR +blue{Variable containing a list of frequencies. Default to lines%f}
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) masked                                        +blue{Masked cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{VELOCITY /MASK}
\label{sec:MASK:VELOCITY:MASK:help}
\index{MASK VELOCITY /MASK option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/MASK} [maskid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MASK                                            +blue{Mask velocity pattern}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *mask*             +blue{Mask cube can be 2D or 3D}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{VELOCITY /FREQVAR}
\label{sec:MASK:VELOCITY:FREQVAR:help}
\index{MASK VELOCITY /FREQVAR option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/FREQVAR} value
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /FREQVAR +blue{Variable containing a list of frequencies. Default to lines%f}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VALUE                                     +blue{FREQVAR value}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{VELOCITY /SIZE}
\label{sec:MASK:VELOCITY:SIZE:help}
\index{MASK VELOCITY /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{VELOCITY /CENTER}
\label{sec:MASK:VELOCITY:CENTER:help}
\index{MASK VELOCITY /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{VELOCITY /RANGE}
\label{sec:MASK:VELOCITY:RANGE:help}
\index{MASK VELOCITY /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\section{FIELD Language On-Line Help}
\label{sec:FIELD:help}
\index{FIELD command list}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  FIELD\                     +blue{Commands to interact with fields of vectors}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  DIVERGENCE             +blue{Compute the divergence of a 2D spatial gradient}
  GRADIENT                               +blue{Compute the gradient of a field}
  GRADTHIN                                   +blue{Output a mask of thin edges}
  HESSIAN                                    +blue{Output a mask of thin edges}
  INCLINE                   +blue{Compute column density and centroid velocity}
  MINMAX                  +blue{Compute the MINMAX image or image of a 3D cube}
  OBSERVE                   +blue{Compute column density and centroid velocity}
  SHT                                           +blue{Standard Hough Transform}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{DIVERGENCE}
\label{sec:FIELD:DIVERGENCE:help}
\index{FIELD DIVERGENCE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                [FIELD\]+blue{DIVERGENCE} [df_dx df_dy]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract               +blue{Compute the divergence of a 2D spatial gradient}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *gradient,dx*           +blue{Gradient x component}
  #2 (optional,read,imaset) *gradient,dy*           +blue{Gradient y component}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) divergence                             +blue{Cube of divergence}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{GRADIENT}
\label{sec:FIELD:GRADIENT:help}
\index{FIELD GRADIENT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        [FIELD\]+blue{GRADIENT} [field]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                               +blue{Compute the gradient of a field}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *                           +blue{Cube of 2D field}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) gradient,dx                            +blue{Cube of X gradient}
  #2 (sameset) gradient,dy                            +blue{Cube of Y gradient}
  #3 (sameset) gradient,amplitude             +blue{Cube of gradient amplitude}
  #4 (sameset) gradient,angle                     +blue{Cube of gradient angle}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{GRADTHIN}
\label{sec:FIELD:GRADTHIN:help}
\index{FIELD GRADTHIN command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                [FIELD\]+blue{GRADTHIN} [cubeid] [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                   +blue{Output a mask of thin edges}

  Mark pixels that are a local maximum of the gradient amplitude along
  the gradient direction
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *gradient,amplitude* +blue{Cube of gradient amplit}
  #2 (optional,read,imaset) *gradient,angle*     +blue{Cube of gradient angles}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) thinned,edge                        +blue{Cube of thinned edges}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GRADTHIN /SIZE}
\label{sec:FIELD:GRADTHIN:SIZE:help}
\index{FIELD GRADTHIN /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GRADTHIN /CENTER}
\label{sec:FIELD:GRADTHIN:CENTER:help}
\index{FIELD GRADTHIN /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{GRADTHIN /RANGE}
\label{sec:FIELD:GRADTHIN:RANGE:help}
\index{FIELD GRADTHIN /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{HESSIAN}
\label{sec:FIELD:HESSIAN:help}
\index{FIELD HESSIAN command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                 [FIELD\]+blue{HESSIAN} [cubeid] [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                   +blue{Output a mask of thin edges}

  Mark pixels that are a local maximum of the gradient amplitude along
  the gradient direction
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *gradient,dx*             +blue{Cube of X gradient}
  #2 (optional,read,imaset) *gradient,dy*             +blue{Cube of Y gradient}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) hessian,dx2                       +blue{Cube of hessian d2f_dx2}
  #2 (sameset) hessian,dy2                       +blue{Cube of hessian d2f_dy2}
  #3 (sameset) hessian,dxdy                     +blue{Cube of hessian d2f_dxdy}
  #4 (sameset) laplacian      +blue{Cube of laplacian (= trace of the hessian)}
  #5 (sameset) hessian,determinant           +blue{Cube of hessian determinant}
  #6 (sameset) hessian,eigen,value,1   +blue{Cube of hessian first eigen value}
  #7 (sameset) hessian,eigen,value,2   +blue{Cube of hessian first eigen value}
  #8 (sameset) hessian,angle                       +blue{Cube of hessian angle}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HESSIAN /SIZE}
\label{sec:FIELD:HESSIAN:SIZE:help}
\index{FIELD HESSIAN /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HESSIAN /CENTER}
\label{sec:FIELD:HESSIAN:CENTER:help}
\index{FIELD HESSIAN /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HESSIAN /RANGE}
\label{sec:FIELD:HESSIAN:RANGE:help}
\index{FIELD HESSIAN /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{INCLINE}
\label{sec:FIELD:INCLINE:help}
\index{FIELD INCLINE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                 [FIELD\]+blue{INCLINE} voldens vx vy vz [+blue{/ANGLE} angle]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                  +blue{Compute column density and centroid velocity}

  It uses the 3D volume density and velocity fields'and it assumes the
  optically thin limit
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                            +blue{Volume density}
  #2 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                 +blue{x-axis velocity component}
  #3 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                 +blue{y-axis velocity component}
  #4 (mandatory,read,imaset) *                 +blue{z-axis velocity component}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ANGLE                                               +blue{Inclination angle}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) *,inclined                                 +blue{Volume density}
  #2 (sameset) *,inclined                      +blue{x-axis velocity component}
  #3 (sameset) *,inclined                      +blue{y-axis velocity component}
  #4 (sameset) *,inclined                      +blue{z-axis velocity component}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{INCLINE /ANGLE}
\label{sec:FIELD:INCLINE:ANGLE:help}
\index{FIELD INCLINE /ANGLE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/ANGLE} angle
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ANGLE                                               +blue{Inclination angle}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ANGLE                                             +blue{angle}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{MINMAX}
\label{sec:FIELD:MINMAX:help}
\index{FIELD MINMAX command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                    [FIELD\]+blue{MINMAX} cubeid [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                +blue{Compute the MINMAX image or image of a 3D cube}

  Input/output cubes must/will be real
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *                                    +blue{3D cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) local,2d,minimum                               +blue{min output}
  #2 (sameset) local,2d,maximum                               +blue{max output}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MINMAX /SIZE}
\label{sec:FIELD:MINMAX:SIZE:help}
\index{FIELD MINMAX /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MINMAX /CENTER}
\label{sec:FIELD:MINMAX:CENTER:help}
\index{FIELD MINMAX /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MINMAX /RANGE}
\label{sec:FIELD:MINMAX:RANGE:help}
\index{FIELD MINMAX /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{OBSERVE}
\label{sec:FIELD:OBSERVE:help}
\index{FIELD OBSERVE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                [FIELD\]+blue{OBSERVE} voldens vx vy vz
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                  +blue{Compute column density and centroid velocity}

  It uses the 3D volume density and velocity fieldsand it assumes the
  optically thin limit
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,read,speset) *                            +blue{Volume density}
  #2 (mandatory,read,speset) *                 +blue{x-axis velocity component}
  #3 (mandatory,read,speset) *                 +blue{y-axis velocity component}
  #4 (mandatory,read,speset) *                 +blue{z-axis velocity component}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) observed,column,density               +blue{Column density cube}
  #2 (sameset) observed,centroid,velocity         +blue{Centroid velocity cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{SHT}
\label{sec:FIELD:SHT:help}
\index{FIELD SHT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            [FIELD\]+blue{SHT} [cubeid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                      +blue{Standard Hough Transform}

  From images to line parameters
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *gradient,amplitude* +blue{Cube of gradient amplit}
  #2 (optional,read,imaset) *gradient,angle*     +blue{Cube of gradient angles}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) sht,accumulator       +blue{Cube of line parameter accumulators}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\section{FIT Language On-Line Help}
\label{sec:FIT:help}
\index{FIT command list}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  FIT\                                     +blue{Commands for spectral fitting}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  MINIMIZE                                      +blue{Fit functions to spectra}
  PARAMETERS                         +blue{Extract parameters from fit results}
  RESIDUALS                                 +blue{Compute residuals from a fit}
  RESULT                           +blue{Produce a model cube from fit results}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{MINIMIZE}
\label{sec:FIT:MINIMIZE:help}
\index{FIT MINIMIZE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                              [FIT\]+blue{MINIMIZE} [cubeid [windowid]]
                                 [+blue{/RANGE} v11 v12 [... [vn1 vn2]] [unit]]
                       [+blue{/PARAMETERS} [parameterid]] [+blue{/WINDOWS} [windowid]]
                                                        [+blue{/MASK} [maskid]]
     [+blue{/LINE} method nfuncs [f11 p11 ... f1m p1m ... fn1 pn1 ... fnm pnm]]
                                                          [+blue{/HFS} hfsfile]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                      +blue{Fit functions to spectra}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE              +blue{Define velocity range(s) for first guess estimates}
  /PARAMETERS +blue{Fetch a fit parameter cube to be used as an inital guesses}
  /WINDOWS +blue{Fetch a cube of windows to help define initial parameter gues}
  /MASK                 +blue{Use a 2D mask to define the regions to be fitted}
  /LINE              +blue{Set fitting method and optionally its first guesses}
  /HFS                                              +blue{Provide the HFS file}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) fit,minimized                   +blue{Cube of fitted parameters}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MINIMIZE /RANGE}
\label{sec:FIT:MINIMIZE:RANGE:help}
\index{FIT MINIMIZE /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                           +blue{/RANGE} v11 v12 [... [vn1 vn2]] [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE              +blue{Define velocity range(s) for first guess estimates}

  Range(s) is (are) in velocity, multiple ranges are accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) V11                                +blue{Start of first range}
  #2 (mandatory) V12                                  +blue{End of first range}
  #3 (unlimited) VN1                                +blue{Start of n-eth range}
  #4 (unlimited) VN2                                  +blue{End of n-eth range}
  #5 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MINIMIZE /PARAMETERS}
\label{sec:FIT:MINIMIZE:PARAMETERS:help}
\index{FIT MINIMIZE /PARAMETERS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                       +blue{/PARAMETERS} [parameterid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /PARAMETERS +blue{Fetch a fit parameter cube to be used as an inital guesses}

  The input CUBE can be the output of the command MINIMIZE orcan be
  created freely by the user
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *minimized*                   +blue{Parameter cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MINIMIZE /WINDOWS}
\label{sec:FIT:MINIMIZE:WINDOWS:help}
\index{FIT MINIMIZE /WINDOWS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                             +blue{/WINDOWS} [windowid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /WINDOWS +blue{Fetch a cube of windows to help define initial parameter gues}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *window*                         +blue{Window cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MINIMIZE /MASK}
\label{sec:FIT:MINIMIZE:MASK:help}
\index{FIT MINIMIZE /MASK option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                  +blue{/MASK} [maskid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /MASK                 +blue{Use a 2D mask to define the regions to be fitted}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *mask*             +blue{Mask cube can be 2D or 3D}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MINIMIZE /LINE}
\label{sec:FIT:MINIMIZE:LINE:help}
\index{FIT MINIMIZE /LINE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax            +blue{/LINE} method nfuncs [f11 p11 ... f1m p1m ... fn1 pn1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /LINE              +blue{Set fitting method and optionally its first guesses}

  If first guesses are omitted, smart first guesses will be computed for
  a single line. If both /LINE and /INITIAL are  not  present  a  single
  gaussian is assumed with initial guesses chosen by MINIMIZE.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) METHOD                               +blue{Method for fitting}
     Possible values: GAUSSIAN, ABSORPTION, HFS or SHELL
  #2 (mandatory) NFUNCS                     +blue{Number of lines to be fitted}
  #3 (unlimited) F11      +blue{Flag for the first parameter of the first line}
  #4 (unlimited) P11                   +blue{First parameter of the first line}
  #5 (unlimited) FNM      +blue{Flag for the m-eth parameter of the n-eth line}
  #6 (unlimited) PNM                   +blue{m-eth parameter of the n-eth line}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MINIMIZE /HFS}
\label{sec:FIT:MINIMIZE:HFS:help}
\index{FIT MINIMIZE /HFS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/HFS} hfsfile
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /HFS                                              +blue{Provide the HFS file}

  Provide the file describing the HyperFine Structure (HFS) of the line
  to be fitted using the methods: HFS and ABSORPTION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) HFSFILE               +blue{File containing the HFS structure}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{PARAMETERS}
\label{sec:FIT:PARAMETERS:help}
\index{FIT PARAMETERS command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                 [FIT\]+blue{PARAMETERS} [fit] [+blue{/SELECT} method [ifunc]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                           +blue{Extract parameters from fit results}

  Apart from extracting the fit results a SNR image is produced for
  each of the parameters fitted. This SNR image is computed as the fit
  result divided by the fit error, except for the position parameters
  (Frequency and Velocity). In this case the SNR is computed as the
  Spectral resolution divided by the fit error.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *fit,minimized*          +blue{FIT\MINIMIZE output}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SELECT                         +blue{Select which fit result to be computed}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) fit,parameters,method             +blue{The fitting method code}
  #2 (sameset) fit,parameters,nlines          +blue{The number of fitted lines}
  #3 (sameset) fit,parameters,*,noise,*     +blue{The base or line noise image}
  #4 (sameset) fit,parameters,*,*,*,*  +blue{The fitted parameters (as many as}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PARAMETERS /SELECT}
\label{sec:FIT:PARAMETERS:SELECT:help}
\index{FIT PARAMETERS /SELECT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                          +blue{/SELECT} method [ifunc]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SELECT                         +blue{Select which fit result to be computed}

  If ifunc is not given or is 0 all components are included
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) METHOD                            +blue{Method to be selected}
     Possible values: GAUSSIAN, ABSORPTION, HFS or SHELL
  #2 (optional) IFUNC                     +blue{which component to be selected}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{RESIDUALS}
\label{sec:FIT:RESIDUALS:help}
\index{FIT RESIDUALS command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax         [FIT\]+blue{RESIDUALS} [cube [fit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
                                 [+blue{/HFS} hfsfile] [+blue{/SELECT} method [ifunc]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                  +blue{Compute residuals from a fit}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *cube*                           +blue{Signal cube}
  #2 (optional,read,speset) *fit,minimized* +blue{Cube containing fit residual}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE                             +blue{Define velocity range for residuals}
  /HFS                                              +blue{Provide the HFS file}
  /SELECT                         +blue{Select which fit result to be computed}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) fit,residuals                           +blue{Cube of residuals}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{RESIDUALS /RANGE}
\label{sec:FIT:RESIDUALS:RANGE:help}
\index{FIT RESIDUALS /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE                             +blue{Define velocity range for residuals}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{RESIDUALS /HFS}
\label{sec:FIT:RESIDUALS:HFS:help}
\index{FIT RESIDUALS /HFS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/HFS} hfsfile
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /HFS                                              +blue{Provide the HFS file}

  Provide the file describing the HyperFine Structure (HFS) of the line
  to be fitted using the methods: HFS and ABSORPTION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) HFSFILE               +blue{File containing the HFS structure}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{RESIDUALS /SELECT}
\label{sec:FIT:RESIDUALS:SELECT:help}
\index{FIT RESIDUALS /SELECT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                          +blue{/SELECT} method [ifunc]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SELECT                         +blue{Select which fit result to be computed}

  If ifunc is not given or is 0 all components are included
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) METHOD                            +blue{Method to be selected}
     Possible values: GAUSSIAN, ABSORPTION, HFS or SHELL
  #2 (optional) IFUNC                     +blue{which component to be selected}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{RESULT}
\label{sec:FIT:RESULT:help}
\index{FIT RESULT command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax            [FIT\]+blue{RESULT} [cube [fit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
                                 [+blue{/HFS} hfsfile] [+blue{/SELECT} method [ifunc]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                         +blue{Produce a model cube from fit results}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,header,speset) *cube*                         +blue{Signal cube}
  #2 (optional,read,speset) *fit,minimized*  +blue{Cube containing fit results}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE                               +blue{Define velocity range for results}
  /HFS                                              +blue{Provide the HFS file}
  /SELECT                         +blue{Select which fit result to be computed}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) fit,result                                +blue{Cube of results}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{RESULT /RANGE}
\label{sec:FIT:RESULT:RANGE:help}
\index{FIT RESULT /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE                               +blue{Define velocity range for results}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{RESULT /HFS}
\label{sec:FIT:RESULT:HFS:help}
\index{FIT RESULT /HFS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                    +blue{/HFS} hfsfile
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /HFS                                              +blue{Provide the HFS file}

  Provide the file describing the HyperFine Structure (HFS) of the line
  to be fitted using the methods: HFS and ABSORPTION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) HFSFILE               +blue{File containing the HFS structure}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{RESULT /SELECT}
\label{sec:FIT:RESULT:SELECT:help}
\index{FIT RESULT /SELECT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                          +blue{/SELECT} method [ifunc]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SELECT                         +blue{Select which fit result to be computed}

  If ifunc is not given or is 0 all components are included
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) METHOD                            +blue{Method to be selected}
     Possible values: GAUSSIAN, ABSORPTION, HFS or SHELL
  #2 (optional) IFUNC                     +blue{which component to be selected}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\section{HISTOGRAM Language On-Line Help}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM command list}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  HISTOGRAM\                      +blue{Compute histograms and operate on them}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  HISTO1D                                +blue{Compute the histogram of a cube}
  HISTO2D                       +blue{Compute the joint histogram of two cubes}
  HISTO3D                     +blue{Compute the joint histogram of three cubes}
  MASK2MASK                                                       +blue{coucou}
  MINMAX               +blue{Compute the minimum and maximum spectra or images}
  MEAN              +blue{Compute the MEAN image or spectrum of a 3D histogram}
  PPV2XYV                      +blue{Stack spectra according to a 2D histogram}
  XY2PP            +blue{Create a PP image from an XY histogram stacked values}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{HISTO1D}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:HISTO1D:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM HISTO1D command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        [HISTOGRAM\]+blue{HISTO1D} cube
                      [+blue{/XAXIS} [lin [nbin min max] | log [nbin max dyn]]]
                                     [+blue{/BLANK} ON|OFF] [+blue{/NORMALIZE} ON|OFF]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                               +blue{Compute the histogram of a cube}

  The bins are sampled following a linear or logarithmic scale. The
  number of bins are automatically computed using the ??? heuristic or
  defined by the user. The histogram can be normalized.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *cube*             +blue{Input cube used as X axis}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /XAXIS                         +blue{Define a regular sampling of the X axis}
  /BLANK                      +blue{Switch setting empty bins to NaN on or off}
  /NORMALIZE   +blue{Switch histogram normalization from counts to % on or off}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (fullset) histo1d                                    +blue{Cube histogram}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HISTO1D /XAXIS}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:HISTO1D:XAXIS:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM HISTO1D /XAXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                +blue{/XAXIS} [lin [nbin min max] | log [nbin max dyn]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /XAXIS                         +blue{Define a regular sampling of the X axis}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) XKIND                         +blue{Linear or logarithmic axis}
  #2 (optional) XNBIN           +blue{Number of bins or method to determine it}
     Possible values: XNBIN, *, SQRT, STURGES or RICE
  #3 (optional) XRANGE1 +blue{Minimum or maximum for a linear or logarithmic a}
  #4 (optional) XRANGE2 +blue{Maximum or dynamical range for a linear or logar}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HISTO1D /BLANK}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:HISTO1D:BLANK:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM HISTO1D /BLANK option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/BLANK} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BLANK                      +blue{Switch setting empty bins to NaN on or off}

  Default is ON.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HISTO1D /NORMALIZE}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:HISTO1D:NORMALIZE:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM HISTO1D /NORMALIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/NORMALIZE} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NORMALIZE   +blue{Switch histogram normalization from counts to % on or off}

  Default is OFF.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{HISTO2D}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:HISTO2D:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM HISTO2D command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                             [HISTOGRAM\]+blue{HISTO2D} xcubeid ycubeid
                      [+blue{/XAXIS} [lin [nbin min max] | log [nbin max dyn]]]
                      [+blue{/YAXIS} [lin [nbin min max] | log [nbin max dyn]]]
                                     [+blue{/BLANK} ON|OFF] [+blue{/NORMALIZE} ON|OFF]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                      +blue{Compute the joint histogram of two cubes}

  Compute the joint histogram of two cubes
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,read,imaset) *cube*         +blue{Input cube #1 used as X axis}
  #2 (mandatory,read,imaset) *cube*         +blue{Input cube #2 used as Y axis}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /XAXIS                         +blue{Define a regular sampling of the X axis}
  /YAXIS                         +blue{Define a regular sampling of the Y axis}
  /BLANK                      +blue{Switch setting empty bins to NaN on or off}
  /NORMALIZE   +blue{Switch histogram normalization from counts to % on or off}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) histo2d                                   +blue{Joint histogram}
  #2 (sameset) histo2d,pointer                    +blue{Positions back pointer}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HISTO2D /XAXIS}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:HISTO2D:XAXIS:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM HISTO2D /XAXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                +blue{/XAXIS} [lin [nbin min max] | log [nbin max dyn]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /XAXIS                         +blue{Define a regular sampling of the X axis}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) XKIND                         +blue{Linear or logarithmic axis}
  #2 (optional) XNBIN           +blue{Number of bins or method to determine it}
     Possible values: XNBIN, *, SQRT, STURGES or RICE
  #3 (optional) XRANGE1 +blue{Minimum or maximum for a linear or logarithmic a}
  #4 (optional) XRANGE2 +blue{Maximum or dynamical range for a linear or logar}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HISTO2D /YAXIS}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:HISTO2D:YAXIS:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM HISTO2D /YAXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                +blue{/YAXIS} [lin [nbin min max] | log [nbin max dyn]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /YAXIS                         +blue{Define a regular sampling of the Y axis}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) YKIND                         +blue{Linear or logarithmic axis}
  #2 (optional) YNBIN           +blue{Number of bins or method to determine it}
     Possible values: YNBIN, *, SQRT, STURGES or RICE
  #3 (optional) YRANGE1 +blue{Minimum or maximum for a linear or logarithmic a}
  #4 (optional) YRANGE2 +blue{Maximum or dynamical range for a linear or logar}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HISTO2D /BLANK}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:HISTO2D:BLANK:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM HISTO2D /BLANK option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/BLANK} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BLANK                      +blue{Switch setting empty bins to NaN on or off}

  Default is ON.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HISTO2D /NORMALIZE}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:HISTO2D:NORMALIZE:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM HISTO2D /NORMALIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/NORMALIZE} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NORMALIZE   +blue{Switch histogram normalization from counts to % on or off}

  Default is OFF.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{HISTO3D}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:HISTO3D:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM HISTO3D command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                           [HISTOGRAM\]+blue{HISTO3D} xcube ycube zcube
                      [+blue{/XAXIS} [lin [nbin min max] | log [nbin max dyn]]]
                      [+blue{/YAXIS} [lin [nbin min max] | log [nbin max dyn]]]
                      [+blue{/ZAXIS} [lin [nbin min max] | log [nbin max dyn]]]
                                     [+blue{/BLANK} ON|OFF] [+blue{/NORMALIZE} ON|OFF]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                    +blue{Compute the joint histogram of three cubes}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory,read,imaset) *cube*         +blue{Input cube #1 used as X axis}
  #2 (mandatory,read,imaset) *cube*         +blue{Input cube #2 used as Y axis}
  #3 (mandatory,read,imaset) *cube*         +blue{Input cube #3 used as Z axis}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /XAXIS                         +blue{Define a regular sampling of the X axis}
  /YAXIS                         +blue{Define a regular sampling of the Y axis}
  /ZAXIS                         +blue{Define a regular sampling of the Z axis}
  /BLANK                      +blue{Switch setting empty bins to NaN on or off}
  /NORMALIZE   +blue{Switch histogram normalization from counts to % on or off}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (fullset) histo3d                                   +blue{Joint histogram}
  #2 (sameset) histo3d,pointer                    +blue{Positions back pointer}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HISTO3D /XAXIS}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:HISTO3D:XAXIS:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM HISTO3D /XAXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                +blue{/XAXIS} [lin [nbin min max] | log [nbin max dyn]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /XAXIS                         +blue{Define a regular sampling of the X axis}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) XKIND                         +blue{Linear or logarithmic axis}
  #2 (optional) XNBIN           +blue{Number of bins or method to determine it}
     Possible values: XNBIN, *, SQRT, STURGES or RICE
  #3 (optional) XRANGE1 +blue{Minimum or maximum for a linear or logarithmic a}
  #4 (optional) XRANGE2 +blue{Maximum or dynamical range for a linear or logar}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HISTO3D /YAXIS}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:HISTO3D:YAXIS:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM HISTO3D /YAXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                +blue{/YAXIS} [lin [nbin min max] | log [nbin max dyn]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /YAXIS                         +blue{Define a regular sampling of the Y axis}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) YKIND                         +blue{Linear or logarithmic axis}
  #2 (optional) YNBIN           +blue{Number of bins or method to determine it}
     Possible values: YNBIN, *, SQRT, STURGES or RICE
  #3 (optional) YRANGE1 +blue{Minimum or maximum for a linear or logarithmic a}
  #4 (optional) YRANGE2 +blue{Maximum or dynamical range for a linear or logar}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HISTO3D /ZAXIS}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:HISTO3D:ZAXIS:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM HISTO3D /ZAXIS option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                +blue{/ZAXIS} [lin [nbin min max] | log [nbin max dyn]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /ZAXIS                         +blue{Define a regular sampling of the Z axis}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional) ZKIND                         +blue{Linear or logarithmic axis}
  #2 (optional) ZNBIN           +blue{Number of bins or method to determine it}
     Possible values: ZNBIN, *, SQRT, STURGES or RICE
  #3 (optional) ZRANGE1 +blue{Minimum or maximum for a linear or logarithmic a}
  #4 (optional) ZRANGE2 +blue{Maximum or dynamical range for a linear or logar}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HISTO3D /BLANK}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:HISTO3D:BLANK:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM HISTO3D /BLANK option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                   +blue{/BLANK} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /BLANK                      +blue{Switch setting empty bins to NaN on or off}

  Default is ON.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{HISTO3D /NORMALIZE}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:HISTO3D:NORMALIZE:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM HISTO3D /NORMALIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                               +blue{/NORMALIZE} ON|OFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /NORMALIZE   +blue{Switch histogram normalization from counts to % on or off}

  Default is OFF.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) ONOFF                           +blue{Switch action ON or OFF}
     Possible values: ON or OFF

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{MASK2MASK}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:MASK2MASK:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM MASK2MASK command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                        [HISTOGRAM\]+blue{MASK2MASK} [pointerid maskid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                                                        +blue{coucou}

 coucou
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *pointer* +blue{Pointer from original cubes to his}
  #2 (optional,read,imaset) *mask*                     +blue{Mask of histogram}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) mask                               +blue{Mask of original cubes}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{MINMAX}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:MINMAX:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM MINMAX command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                [HISTOGRAM\]+blue{MINMAX} [cube] [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract             +blue{Compute the minimum and maximum spectra or images}

  Input and output cubes are real
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *                                 +blue{Input cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) minimum,image                      +blue{Cube of minimum values}
  #2 (sameset) maximum,image                      +blue{Cube of maximum values}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MINMAX /SIZE}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:MINMAX:SIZE:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM MINMAX /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MINMAX /CENTER}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:MINMAX:CENTER:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM MINMAX /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MINMAX /RANGE}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:MINMAX:RANGE:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM MINMAX /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{MEAN}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:MEAN:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM MEAN command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                 [HISTOGRAM\]+blue{MEAN} histo3d [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract          +blue{Compute the MEAN image or spectrum of a 3D histogram}

  Input/output cubes must/will be real
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *histo3d*                       +blue{3D histogram}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) mean,image                                    +blue{mean output}
  #2 (sameset) rms,image                                      +blue{rms output}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MEAN /SIZE}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:MEAN:SIZE:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM MEAN /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MEAN /CENTER}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:MEAN:CENTER:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM MEAN /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MEAN /RANGE}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:MEAN:RANGE:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM MEAN /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{PPV2XYV}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:PPV2XYV:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM PPV2XYV command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                  [HISTOGRAM\]+blue{PPV2XYV} [ppvid fromtoid histo2did]
                                                    [+blue{/WEIGHT} [weightid]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                     +blue{Stack spectra according to a 2D histogram}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *cube*       +blue{Position-Position-Velocity cube}
  #2 (optional,read,imaset) *histo2d,pointer*              +blue{From PP to XY}
  #3 (optional,header,imaset) *histo2d*                     +blue{2D histogram}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /WEIGHT                                  +blue{Cube to weight the input data}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) xyv,cube                                +blue{X-Y-Velocity cube}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PPV2XYV /WEIGHT}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:PPV2XYV:WEIGHT:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM PPV2XYV /WEIGHT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                              +blue{/WEIGHT} [weightid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /WEIGHT                                  +blue{Cube to weight the input data}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *weight*         +blue{Weight cube can be 2D or 3D}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{XY2PP}
\label{sec:HISTOGRAM:XY2PP:help}
\index{HISTOGRAM XY2PP command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                        [HISTOGRAM\]+blue{XY2PP} [ppinid fromtoid xyid]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract         +blue{Create a PP image from an XY histogram stacked values}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *              +blue{Input Position-Position image}
  #2 (optional,read,imaset) *pointer*                      +blue{From PP to XY}
  #3 (optional,read,imaset) *        +blue{Cube of 2D histogram stacked values}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) cube                       +blue{Output Position-Position image}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\section{STATISTICS Language On-Line Help}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:help}
\index{STATISTICS command list}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  STATISTICS\                     +blue{Simple statistical operations on cubes}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  MEAN                   +blue{Compute the MEAN image or spectrum of a 3D cube}
  MEDIAN               +blue{Compute the MEDIAN image or spectrum of a 3D cube}
  MINMAX               +blue{Compute the MINMAX image or spectrum of a 3D cube}
  PERCENTILE                    +blue{Compute the percentile spectrum or image}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{MEAN}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:MEAN:help}
\index{STATISTICS MEAN command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                 [STATISTICS\]+blue{MEAN} cubeid [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract               +blue{Compute the MEAN image or spectrum of a 3D cube}

  Input/output cubes must/will be real
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *                                    +blue{3D cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) mean,image                                    +blue{mean output}
  #2 (sameset) rms,image                                      +blue{rms output}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MEAN /SIZE}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:MEAN:SIZE:help}
\index{STATISTICS MEAN /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MEAN /CENTER}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:MEAN:CENTER:help}
\index{STATISTICS MEAN /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MEAN /RANGE}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:MEAN:RANGE:help}
\index{STATISTICS MEAN /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{MEDIAN}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:MEDIAN:help}
\index{STATISTICS MEDIAN command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax               [STATISTICS\]+blue{MEDIAN} cubeid [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract             +blue{Compute the MEDIAN image or spectrum of a 3D cube}

  Input/output cubes must/will be real
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *                                    +blue{3D cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) median,image                                +blue{median output}
  #2 (sameset) mad,image                                      +blue{mad output}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MEDIAN /SIZE}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:MEDIAN:SIZE:help}
\index{STATISTICS MEDIAN /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MEDIAN /CENTER}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:MEDIAN:CENTER:help}
\index{STATISTICS MEDIAN /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MEDIAN /RANGE}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:MEDIAN:RANGE:help}
\index{STATISTICS MEDIAN /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{MINMAX}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:MINMAX:help}
\index{STATISTICS MINMAX command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax               [STATISTICS\]+blue{MINMAX} cubeid [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]]
              [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]] [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract             +blue{Compute the MINMAX image or spectrum of a 3D cube}

  Input/output cubes must/will be real
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,speset) *                                    +blue{3D cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) minimum,image                                  +blue{min output}
  #2 (sameset) maximum,image                                  +blue{max output}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MINMAX /SIZE}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:MINMAX:SIZE:help}
\index{STATISTICS MINMAX /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MINMAX /CENTER}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:MINMAX:CENTER:help}
\index{STATISTICS MINMAX /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{MINMAX /RANGE}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:MINMAX:RANGE:help}
\index{STATISTICS MINMAX /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsection{PERCENTILE}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:PERCENTILE:help}
\index{STATISTICS PERCENTILE command}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax             [STATISTICS\]+blue{PERCENTILE} [cubeid] [+blue{/AT} value [unit]]
                  [+blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]] [+blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]]
                                              [+blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Abstract                      +blue{Compute the percentile spectrum or image}

  Input/output cubes must/will be real
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (optional,read,imaset) *                                +blue{Signal cube}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /AT      +blue{Value of the P data percentage for the percentile computation}
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Products
  #1 (sameset) low,percentile,spectrum +blue{Spectrum or image for the percent}
  #2 (sameset) high,percentile,spectrum +blue{Spectrum or image for the percen}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PERCENTILE /AT}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:PERCENTILE:AT:help}
\index{STATISTICS PERCENTILE /AT option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                                +blue{/AT} value [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /AT      +blue{Value of the P data percentage for the percentile computation}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) VALUE                                          +blue{AT value}
  #2 (optional) UNIT                                             +blue{AT unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     Unknown

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PERCENTILE /SIZE}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:PERCENTILE:SIZE:help}
\index{STATISTICS PERCENTILE /SIZE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                            +blue{/SIZE} sl [sm [unit]]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /SIZE           +blue{Define the spatial size of the cube region of interest}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) SL                                 +blue{Size in L coordinate}
  #2 (optional) SM                                  +blue{Size in M coordinate}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                           +blue{Size unit}
     Possible units (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) are:
     radian, degree, arcmin or arcsec

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PERCENTILE /CENTER}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:PERCENTILE:CENTER:help}
\index{STATISTICS PERCENTILE /CENTER option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                   +blue{/CENTER} lpos mpos type [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /CENTER       +blue{Define the spatial center of the cube region of interest}

  Describe a position in terms of relative or absolute coordinates. In
  case of relative coordinates they are relative to the current
  projection center, the possible units for a relative position are FOV
  units. Absolute positions can be given in three possible units:
  Equatorial (sexagesimal strings in the current spatial frame), Radian
  or Degree
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) LPOS                           +blue{Position in L coordinate}
  #2 (mandatory) MPOS                           +blue{Position in m coordinate}
  #3 (mandatory) TYPE                                   +blue{Coordinates type}
     Possible values: *, Relative or Absolute
  #4 (optional) UNIT                              +blue{Unit for lpos and mpos}

\end{PlusVerbatim}
\subsubsection{PERCENTILE /RANGE}
\label{sec:STATISTICS:PERCENTILE:RANGE:help}
\index{STATISTICS PERCENTILE /RANGE option}
\begin{PlusVerbatim}
  Syntax                                        +blue{/RANGE} first last [unit]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  /RANGE        +blue{Define the spectral range of the cube region of interest}

  A single spectral range is accepted
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Arguments
  #1 (mandatory) FIRST                                    +blue{Start of range}
  #2 (mandatory) LAST                                       +blue{End of range}
  #3 (optional) UNIT                                          +blue{Range unit}
     Possible unit (with an optional magnitude prefix like k, M,...) is:
     m/s

\end{PlusVerbatim}
